JP6747533B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, a moving member formed to be moved, a driving means for generating a driving force to move the movable member, the driving force which the drive means is generated to move member A first transmission member (first gear), to which a moving member is connected, and a first transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member and the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted through the meshing. there is a second transmission member (second gear) and a game machine that will be formed a part of the transmitting means for transmitting to the member (Patent Document 1).

In this case, the second transmitting member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member is rotated, so that the moving member connected to the first transmitting member is moved. The first transmission member is moved along with the rotation .

JP, 2011-110376, A

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a problem that Ru danger that the durability is lowered.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable FIG Rukoto improved durability.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, the moving means is formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a drive generated by the driving means. Transmitting means for transmitting force to the moving means, the transmitting means having a tooth on at least a part thereof, the first transmitting means to which the moving means is connected, and the first transmitting means. A second transmission means having at least a part of teeth capable of engaging with the teeth; and a coupling means connected to the second transmission means and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission means, the coupling means, the successive teeth with the teeth of the second transmission means are formed, the teeth said consecutive, Ru is formed to a larger tooth width than the tooth width of the teeth of the second transmission means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is provided with a moving means that is movably formed and a transmitting means that transmits a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means, and the transmitting means. A first transmission means having at least a part of teeth and connected to the moving means, a second transmission means having at least a part of teeth capable of engaging with the teeth of the first transmission means, and a second transmission means thereof. A connecting means connected to the transmitting means, wherein the connecting means or the moving means is formed with teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmitting means or the first transmitting means, and the continuous teeth are The tooth width is larger than the tooth width of the teeth of the second transmission means or the first transmission means.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, further comprising a board box.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the durability .

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, it is possible to improve the durability.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, the board can be housed in the board box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which carried out the front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit. (A) is a front view of a case body, (b) is a front view of a fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates typically the support structure by the case body of a 1st gear, a 2nd gear, and a 3rd gear. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the compound operation unit which carried out the front view of the compound operation unit which disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view of the compound operation unit in the state which decomposed|disassembled a part of compound operation unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of an opening/closing first gear, an opening/closing second gear, a rotating first gear and a rotating second gear. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, which illustrates, in a time series, a step of assembling the opening/closing first gear and the opening/closing second gear, and the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear on the first shaft and the second shaft. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit, which illustrates, in a time series, a step of assembling the opening/closing first gear and the opening/closing second gear, and the rotating first gear and the rotating second gear on the first shaft and the second shaft. FIG. 6 is an exploded front view of a combined operation unit for explaining a relative displacement state of an opening/closing second gear and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. FIG. 7 is a front view of the combined operation unit illustrating the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the compound operation unit which illustrates typically the meshing state of the opening/closing 1st gear and the opening/closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotation 1st gear and the rotation 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd joint members are arranged at the retracted position. It is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit and the 2nd combined operation unit in the state where the 1st engaging member and a pair of 2nd connecting members are arranged in a combined position. 33A is a front view of the first combined movement unit, and FIG. 33B is a bottom view of the first combined operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a 1st combined operation unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a 1st combination operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out the front view of the disassembled slide mechanism part. It is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part which carried out rear view of the disassembled slide mechanism part. (A) is a front view of the 1st combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position, (b) is the 1st combination in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit in the state where the 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position, and (b) is the 1st combined state in the state where a 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd combination operation unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd combination operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of a 2nd combination operation unit. It is a front view of a 2nd combination operation unit. It is the model figure which looked at the 1st joint operation unit and the 2nd joint operation unit in the state where the 1st joint member and a pair of 2nd joint members were arranged at the joint position. FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the annular movement unit in a state where the annular formation member is arranged at the retracted position. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the circular ring operation unit in a state where the circular ring forming member is arranged at the coupling position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the annular motion unit which looked at the disassembled annular motion unit from the front. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the annular motion unit which carried out rear view of the disassembled annular motion unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of a link member, (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in the portion Lc of FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG. It is a partially expanded rear view of an annular motion unit. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arranged at a retracted position. FIG. 53 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LIII-LIII in FIG. 52. FIG. 7 is a rear schematic view of a circular ring operation unit that schematically illustrates a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring forming members is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position. FIG. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LV-LV of FIG. 54. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arranged at a connecting position. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LVII-LVII in FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of a rocking motion unit in a state where an arm member is extended to an extended position. 9 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. FIG. It is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rocking|swiveling operation unit which looked at the disassembled rocking|swiveling operation unit in front. 61A is a rear view of the swing motion unit in a state where the arm member is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in the portion LXIb of FIG. 61A. is there. (A) is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in a portion LXIIb of FIG. 62(a). (A) is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in a portion LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). 64A is a rear view of the swing motion unit, and FIG. 64B is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing motion unit in the portion LXIVb of FIG. It is a top view in the assembly state of the middle case body, the back case body, and the front case body in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate case body, the rear case body, and the front case body taken along line LXVI-LXVI of FIG. 65. (A) is a side view of a link member, (b) is a top view in the assembled state of an intermediate case body, a rear case body, and a front case body. It is a rear perspective view of a raising/lowering base body. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arranged at a retracted position. FIG. 70 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LXX-LXX in FIG. 69. It is a back surface schematic diagram of a circular ring operation unit which illustrates typically a circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arranged at a connecting position. FIG. 72 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit taken along the line LXXI-LXXI in FIG. 71. (A) is a side view of the link member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a top view in the assembly state of an intermediate case body, a back case body, and a front case body. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the circular ring operation unit in which a pair of circular ring formation members are arrange|positioned in the coupling position. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the 1st combined operation unit in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the 1st combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position, (b) is the 1st combination in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit in the state where the 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position, and (b) is the 1st combined state in the state where a 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st combined operation unit in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the 1st combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position, (b) is the 1st combination in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit in the state where the 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position, and (b) is the 1st combined state in the state where a 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st combination operation unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the 1st combination operation unit in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position, (b) is the 1st combination in the state where the 1st combination member is arranged in the retracted position It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of the 1st combined operation unit in the state where the 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position, and (b) is the 1st combined state in the state where a 1st combined member is arranged in a combined position. It is a rear view of an operation unit. (A) to (c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit in 7th Embodiment, (A)-(c) is an exploded perspective view of the compound operation unit in an 8th embodiment. (A)-(c) is an exploded perspective view of the compound operation unit in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the 1st connection member in a 10th embodiment, and (b) is a bottom view of the 1st connection member in arrow LXXXVIIb direction view of Drawing 87 (a). 87A is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87A, and FIG. 87B is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87A. FIG. 88C is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member taken along the line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc in FIG. 88A. 89A is a partially enlarged front view of the second coupling operation unit, and FIG. 89B is a top view of the second coupling member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89A. 89A is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member taken along line XCa-XCa of FIG. 89B, and FIG. 90B is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member taken along line XCb-XCb of FIG. 90A. is there. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a 1st coupling member and a 2nd coupling member in the state arrange|positioned at a coupling position.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 35, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape and an outer frame 11 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down on the front surface of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower parts on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front face frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. The ball is fired with the strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with the jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and general winning a prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by partitioning two rails 61 and 62 on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in positive change, shortening time, or normal by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not by a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are won. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (probably changing) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of big jackpot is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability variation. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) of the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 640. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor time saving (state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is improved).

During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than in the normal case. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probable change or shortening of time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric power is changed by one hit. The number of times that the accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal state. Also, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time and once when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or shortening of time, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not adjusted, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than that in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol displaying devices 37A and 37B. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of the ball of the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. Moreover, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric auditors' product 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or shortening time, the winning probability is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side in the lower region of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls emitted to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning opening 640. , The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is winning in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning port 640 may be set to 5.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the shortening of the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than that during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the shortened working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time.

Here, the probability that the jackpot is the same when the ball is won at the first winning opening 64 and when it is won at the second winning opening 640 is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 640 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize in the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a sudden change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having the same size as the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 at the substantially central portion thereof. The second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, a big hit stop symbol and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a that are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid (for opening and closing the front side of the opening/closing plate as an axis). (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening that is a guide path that guides the sphere to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening that is on the opposite side of the guide path from the second specific winning opening 650a side. 651, a driving member 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the driving member 650b to open and close in the left-right direction with the lower side of the opening 651 as an axis. It has and. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small open mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball easily wins the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates to alternate between the closed state and the closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening which is opened and closed separately in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is a predetermined time. A large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is opened for a predetermined period of time when the ball is won into the specific winning openings 65a and 650a during opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. The game state opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, It is not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 and a second outlet 72. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72, not shown. You will be guided to the road. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second outlet 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second outlet 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first outlet 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 2) from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail. 61 or the slope of the outer edge member 73, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first outlet 71, while the lower end of the game area (the inner rail 61 on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a in front view). ) Which has reached (), flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second outlet 72.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

The input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a layout (arrangement) of each component of the game board 13 such as the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the outlets 71, 72 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, each structure of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the like is schematically illustrated, and a part of the game board 13 is partially enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 5, the inner rail 61 has a portion arranged on the lower right side (a portion on the right side of the first outlet 71) linearly extending in a front view of the game area. It is formed so as to be inclined upward in the direction away from the 1-out port 71.

Between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area together with the rails 61, 62 is disposed. It The outer edge member 73 is provided with a circular arc wall portion 73a formed by providing an arcuate wall surface extending from the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the circular arc wall portion 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and a vertical wall portion 73b continuously provided below the vertical wall portion 73b and extending linearly while descending and leaning toward the inner rail 61. The inclined wall portion 73c is formed by providing the wall surface provided on the inner surface side.

In this way, the game area defined by the inner rails 61, the outer rails 62, and the outer edge members 73 has a substantially circular part (the lower right part in FIG. 5) formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. Shaped. Specifically, the region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 disposed on the right side of the first outlet 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 has a substantially rectangular shape. Is formed.

As a result, as compared with the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are extended, an area having a substantially rectangular shape (the lower right portion in FIG. 5) is provided, so that the entire game area The area can be expanded. Therefore, the enlarged area is used as a space for arranging the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Alternatively, it can be utilized as a space for forming a path for letting the ball flow down, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the respective winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path of the ball, etc. can be increased. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered (downward in FIG. 5), and accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 can be increased in size.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, below the third symbol display device 81, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). Was there. Therefore, the space required below the third symbol display device 81 is increased in the vertical direction, and the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81 is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the enlarged portion of the game area (substantially rectangular area, the lower right portion in FIG. 5) is provided as an installation space such as a winning opening or a flow path for the ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged not in the area directly below the first winning opening 64, but in the enlarged portion of the game area described above. Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

According to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is located on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (variable winning device). The side opposite to 65, the left side in FIG. 5) is offset and the ball cannot pass between the inner rail 61 (the lower edge of the game area) (that is, the second specific winning opening 650a and the inner rail 61). Will be placed). Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, by providing two paths (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharging path, It is possible to further increase the size of the three-symbol display device 81.

That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, and accordingly, the position of the winning opening is also required to be lowered. For example, when the position of the first winning opening 64 is lowered, a member for guiding the guide plate member 74 (a ball at the time of right-handing (a ball that has passed the right side of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning opening 650a. In order to secure a space for allowing the ball to flow down between the position) and the first winning opening 64, it is necessary to lower the position. As a result, the position of the second specific winning opening 650a also needs to be lowered.

However, if the position of the second specific winning opening 650a is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for letting the ball flow down below the second specific winning opening 650a (between the inner rail 61). That is, the ball that has not flown into the winning port and flows down cannot be discharged from the out port provided below the first winning port 64. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific winning opening 650a, which becomes a factor that the third symbol display device 81 cannot be made sufficiently large.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first outlet 71, the second outlet 72 sandwiches the second specific winning opening 650a, the first outlet 71. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of (that is, the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72 are respectively arranged on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a), the ball flowing down the game area. And, the sphere that has reached the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. 5) from the second specific winning opening 650a is inclined to the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73. It can be made to flow down along and be discharged to the ball discharge path by the first outlet 71, while the ball reaching the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side in front view from the second specific winning opening 650a is of the inner rail 61. It can be made to flow down along an inclination (curvature) and discharged from the second outlet 72 to the ball discharge path.

In this way, by providing the paths for discharging the balls from the game area to the ball discharging path at two locations (the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72), below the second specific winning opening 650a (inner rail It is not necessary to secure a space for letting the ball flow down (between 61). Therefore, the position of the second specific winning port 650a can be further lowered (close to or adjacent to the inner rail 61), and accordingly, the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered, and by extension. Since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased accordingly.

In the present embodiment, the second winning port 640 and the first specific winning port 65a are arranged offset on the right side of the board, and the second winning port 650a is offset on the left side of the board and close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or abutting), the effect by the rotary motion unit 300 can be more effectively performed.

That is, when the player makes a right hit, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and particularly for the ball which is not won in the second winning port 640, The flow down is rarely noticed by the player. In this case, in the present embodiment, among the spheres that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the spheres that have passed above the second winning opening 640 from right to left pass above the guide plate member 74, It flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, even if the second winning hole 640 is not won, then an opportunity to win the second specific winning hole 650a occurs, and from the expectation of winning the second specific winning hole 650a, A ball passing from the right side to the left side above the winning opening 640 can be focused on by the player. This allows the player's line of sight to be directed toward the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotary operation unit 300 is visible through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not been awarded to the second winning opening 640 flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the player can visually confirm the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300, and the rotation operation is performed. The effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and the rotary operation unit 300 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 is made visible to the player from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotation operation unit 300 is a device that is operated by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or by the result of the lottery due to the winning, and on the rear side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), It is arranged at a position corresponding to the one winning hole 64.

Therefore, for a player who chases a ball flowing down toward the first winning opening 64 with eyes, particularly when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, a rotation operation is performed behind the first winning opening 64. Since the effect produced by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect associated with the winning of the ball at the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotary operation unit 300 will be described later.

In this case, since the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in the left-right direction (the width direction of the game area, the right direction in FIG. 5) with respect to the first winning port 64, they are arranged accordingly. The positions of the first winning opening 64 and the rotation operation unit 300 can be lowered downward (FIG. 5 lower side), and as a result, the rotation operation unit 300 is at a position corresponding to the first winning opening 64 and the game board 13 Even when it is arranged on the back side of the (base plate 60), it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

That is, when the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged vertically in series like a conventional pachinko machine, a position corresponding to the first winning port 64. In arranging the rotary operation unit 300 on the rear surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the rotary operation unit 300 interferes with the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning a prize device 65. The space required for arranging the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 becomes large in the vertical direction, which hinders the third symbol display device 81 from becoming large.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are arranged in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning port 64. Since they are arranged offset in the (width direction of the game area), it is possible to avoid the interference between the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the rotary operation unit 300. As a result, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered, and the third symbol display device 81 can be increased in size.

In particular, with regard to the first variable winning device 65, the offset amount can be sufficiently secured by being offset to the right side by utilizing the substantially rectangular area on the lower right side of the game area, and the second variable winning device 65 can be used. With respect to the winning device 650, the second outlet 72 is provided in addition to the first outlet 71, so that the position thereof can be lowered downward without considering the securing of the space below for the ball to flow down. it can. As a result, a wider space for arranging the rotary operation unit 300 can be secured, so that the contradictory problems of increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be solved. As a result, it is possible to enhance both the effect produced by the third symbol display device 81 and the effect produced by the rotary motion unit 300.

Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that is rotatable around the first winning opening 64. As a result, the entire periphery surrounding the first winning opening 64 can be used as an area for effect. That is, the player can visually recognize the effect produced by the rotation operation unit 300 on the back side of the first winning opening 64. Therefore, when the effect is started with the winning of the first winning opening 64 as a trigger, the effect is performed in an area centered on the first winning opening 64 in which the ball has entered, so that the first winning opening 64 It is possible to enhance the effect of the effect associated with winning the prize.

When the player starts winning the ball into the first winning opening 64 when the state of the rotary operation unit 300 (for example, the rotating position or the lighting state) becomes a predetermined state, The game ball can be thrown toward the center of the object visually recognized by the player (the rotational movement unit 300 in a predetermined state), and the effect of the effect produced by the rotational movement unit 300 can be enhanced. ..

Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape in this way, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively utilized, and the space for disposing other winning openings and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, it is possible to efficiently secure the installation space for the second variable winning device 650. That is, the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first winning opening 64 by utilizing the substantially rectangular area on the lower right side of the game area. While it is relatively easy to secure, it is difficult to secure a sufficient amount of offset to the left with respect to the first winning port 64 in the second variable winning device 650 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, a space for disposing the second variable winning device 650 is efficiently provided between the rotary operation unit 300 and the inner rail 61 on the lower left side. Can be secured.

Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape with the first winning opening 64 as the center, the rotary operation unit 300 can be arranged substantially in the center of the game area in the width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 5). it can. That is, the center of the rotary motion unit 300 can be arranged on the virtual line where the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (the vertical distance in FIG. 5) is maximum. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited space of the game area while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, so that a wider space for disposing the rotary operation unit 300 is secured, and the rotary operation is performed. It is also possible to efficiently increase the size of the unit 300.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640 is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (on the side of the first variable winning device 65). , The right side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second winning opening 640 is arranged such that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for flowing down the ball for winning the second winning opening 640 above the second winning opening 640, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 correspondingly. Can be lowered downwards. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is located at one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (first variable winning). It is arranged offset to the side opposite to the device 65, left side in FIG. In this case, the second specific winning port 650a is arranged such that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a space above the second specific winning opening 650a for letting the ball flow down for winning the second specific winning opening 650a, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is correspondingly provided. The position of can be lowered. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning port 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning port 650a are arranged in a position facing above the game area (upper side of FIG. 5), a space for letting the ball flow down is provided. It is necessary to secure it right above the openings 641 and 651, and accordingly, it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 upward, which hinders the enlargement of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in this embodiment, a space for letting the ball flow down is obliquely above the openings 641 and 651 (the upper right side in FIG. 5). The position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward accordingly. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, when the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric prizes 640a and 650b are not placed directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a, but are set to the second position. The winning holes 640 and the second specific winning holes 650a can be arranged laterally. That is, it is not necessary to secure a space for disposing the electric auditors' products 640a and 650b right above the second winning a prize port 640 and the second specific winning a prize port 650a, and the lower edge position of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered by that much. Can be lowered to As a result, it is possible to further increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the openings 641 and 651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric auditors products 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641 and 651, and only one side is provided. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the drive means (for example, the solenoid) for driving the electric accessory 640a, 650b can be reduced, and the cost of parts can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

In addition, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively lowered. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered downward, so that the space for arranging the winning holes and the like is limited, and the arrangement position of the second winning hole 640 and the through gate 67 is limited. The space becomes narrow. Therefore, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, the difficulty level of entering the second winning opening 640 is higher. There is a risk that it will deteriorate and impair playability. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make the second winning opening 640 possible to win. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty of winning the prize in the second winning port 640 from decreasing and improve the game playability.

Moreover, even if the distance (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 5) from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a is lengthened by the opening 651 facing the other side in the width direction of the game area, It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, a sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball into the second specific winning opening 650a is provided between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. You can As a result, it is possible to increase the speed of detection that a ball has been won in the second specific winning port 650a, so that the player's uplifting feeling associated with winning can be increased.

In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning of the prize from entering the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the opened second specific winning opening 650a, the tenth It is desirable that the driving accessory 650b be closed immediately when the ball wins. However, when the sensor device 652 is disposed behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 increases.

Therefore, the period from when the tenth sphere passes through the opening 651 until it reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period in which the driving accessory 650b is in the open state, becomes long, and the spheres after the eleventh sphere move from the opening 651. A state in which a prize can be won in the second specific winning port 650a is formed for a long period of time, and there is a possibility that fairness of the game may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a is provided between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is arranged in the above, the period until the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 is detected by the sensor device 652 can be shortened. This makes it difficult for the 11th and subsequent balls to enter the opening 651 and prevent overwinning.

Here, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged offset in the left-right direction (one side with the other side) of the gaming board 13, respectively. By doing so, the player can be divided into left and right parts, which contributes to improvement in playability.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win the first specific winning opening 65a to the right of the variable display device unit 80, while the second specific winning opening 650a is variably displayed. The player who passes the left side of the unit 80 is more likely to win the prize. Which of the specific winning openings is to be opened is determined by the jackpot stop pattern at that time, and the player will separate right and left in order to aim at the opening of the specific winning opening.

Which of the specific winning openings is opened can be set in the number of times (round) for each jackpot stop symbol, so only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, in some cases, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened alternately every number of times (rounds).

Therefore, it is necessary for the player to confirm which specific winning opening is opened on a number of times (round) basis, and to strike the specific winning opening to be opened separately to the left and right. It has the effect of not only focusing on the other side, but also on the one side. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13, and to create a situation in which the rotary motion unit 300 arranged behind the first winning opening 64 comes into view. Thus, the rotary operation unit 300 can be paid attention, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making a decision to make a right-and-left hit for each jackpot number (round), and by making the player make a left-and-right hit in the same posture. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game.

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. First, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 9, a housing structure of the respective units 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described.

FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are exploded front perspective views of the operation unit 200 in which the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing motion unit 800, the circular ring motion unit 700, and the first coupling motion unit 500 are mounted on the rear case 210, and in FIG. 9, in addition to the mounting state illustrated in FIG. Further, a state in which the second combined operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are mounted on the rear case 210 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, in the operation unit 200, one surface side (front side in FIG. 7) is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The operation unit 200 includes a rotary operation unit 300, a combined operation unit 400, a first combined operation unit 500, a second combined operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swinging operation unit 800 in the inner space of the rear case 210. It is housed and is constructed as one unit.

Specifically, the first coupling operation unit 500 is located above the opening 211a, the annular operation unit 700 is located below the opening 211a, and the swing operation unit 800 is located on the left and right of the opening 211a. , Are respectively disposed on the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 8).

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second combined operation unit 600 is arranged on the front side of the annular operation unit 700, and the combined operation unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the rocking operation unit 800 in a stacked state in which they are stacked. Then, it is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 9). In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged in a stacked state on the front surface side of the second coupling operation unit 600 and is housed in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 6).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the second combined operation unit 600) and another operation unit (for example, the rotary operation unit 300) are arranged in a stacked state in which they are superposed on the front side. Therefore, in a front view, at least a part of the predetermined operation unit (for example, the front case body 612 of the second combined operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 is made of a light-transmissive material and the operating unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, only a necessary portion of the predetermined operating unit is displayed. Can be visually recognized by the player, and other portions can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member shielded by the other operation units on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, an outline of an operation mode of each of the units 300 to 800 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 are referred to as appropriate.

10 to 13 are front views of the operation unit 200. It should be noted that, in FIG. 10, a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is arranged in the coupling position, and in FIG. 11 a state in which the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 is arranged in the projecting position is shown. 12, the state in which the first engagement member 539 of the first combined movement unit 500 and the second connection member 630 of the second combined movement unit 600 are arranged at the combined position is shown in FIG. The state in which the 492 is arranged in the projecting position is illustrated.

The ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790, and moves (displaces) the pair of ring forming members 790 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupling position shown in FIG. 10. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are distributed to the left and right, are retracted to the back side of the rotary operation unit 300, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81) and are coupled to each other (pair). The circular ring shape is formed by the circular ring forming member 790).

The swing motion unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 that are swingably (rotatably) formed, and the pair of arm members 820 are disposed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the extended position shown in FIG. To move (displace). In the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the combined operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 project their tips into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front surface of the third symbol display device 81).

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 each include a first engagement member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, and the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are illustrated. It moves (displaces) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engagement member 539 is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400, respectively visible to the player. Disabled (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, in the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81), Combined with each other.

The combined operation unit 400 includes four members (operation members 491 and 492) that are swingably (rotatably) formed, and these four members (operation members 491 and 492) are moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. And the projecting position shown in FIG. 13 is operated (displaced). In the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), and two members each are paired. They are arranged in a straight line along the vertical direction. On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 13, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) have their tips projecting into the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81). , Are arranged so as to extend radially from the center of the opening 211a.

The rotary operation unit 300 includes a rotary member 330 that is rotatably formed, and rotates the rotary member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotary member 330 of the rotary operation unit 300 is rotated at a fixed position, and the operation members 491 and 492 of the combined operation unit 400 are at the extended position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged at the forefront at any position, it is always visible to the player through the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

Each of these operation units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be independently operable, and as described above, the operation units 300 to 800 are arranged in a stacked (stacked) state. Those arranged in different layers can be operated simultaneously. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, not only each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated individually, but also these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The rotary operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary motion unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary motion unit 300.

As described above, the rotation operation unit 300 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) at a position (a position overlapping in a front view) corresponding to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5). A receiving member 361 is provided in the center of the front face, and a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 is received from the receiving port 361 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the guide path 380. To do.

On the front side of the rotary operation unit 300, a rotary member 330 having an annular shape in a front view and a decorative member 370 which is a resin member for decoration are arranged, and a receiving port 361 is provided at a substantially central portion of the rotary member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed of a light-transmissive resin material, transmits the lighting and blinking of the LED arranged on the back side thereof to the front side, and is rotated by itself, thereby winning the first prize. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or FIG. 5).

16 and 17 are exploded front perspective views of the rotational operation unit 300 in which the exploded rotational operation unit 300 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 16 illustrates a state in which only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. 17, the illustration of the decorative member 370 is omitted, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 includes a case body 310 that forms a skeleton on the rearmost side thereof, an electric decoration base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the electric decoration base 320. And a plurality of gears (first gear 351, second gear 352, and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotation driving force of the drive motor 340 to the rotation member 330, and A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310, and a decorative member 370 arranged around the case body 310 are mainly provided and configured.

The case body 310 includes an electric decoration base mounting portion 311 formed in a substantially annular shape in front view corresponding to the electric decoration base portion 320, and a gear mounting portion formed by retracting rearward from the electric decoration base mounting portion 311. 312, and the illumination base mounting portion 311 and the mounting base 313 extending outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312 are mainly provided, and these are integrally formed from a resin material.

The decorative base portion 320 is fastened and fixed to the decorative base mounting portion 311 by fastening screws on the front side and the decorative member 370 on the outer peripheral side, respectively. The gear mounting portion 312 is formed by concatenating three recesses each having a substantially circular shape in a front view, which are recessed in correspondence with the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, and the first gear 351 is formed in each of these recesses. To third gear 353 are housed (disposed).

An opening 311a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the decorative base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 in which the first gear 351 is stored. Since the opening 311a is formed in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is attached to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) from the back surface side of the case body 310 by the fastening screw through the opening 311a. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being exposed on the front side of the rotating member 330 and improve the appearance thereof.

In the gear mounting portion 312, a passage opening 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317 are formed in a concave portion in which the first gear 351 is housed. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides the sphere that has flowed in from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to a guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

Note that the guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the attached member and the back surface of the case body 310 by mounting a member having a U-shaped cross section on the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage opening 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

The mounting pedestal 313 is provided with an insertion hole, and the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole is fastened to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, whereby the rotary operation unit 300 is second coupled. It is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 via the operation unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

The fastened portion 315 is a portion (a concave portion having a female screw engraved on the inner periphery) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312 is fastened, and the left and right sides with the passage port 314 interposed therebetween. A pair is formed at an asymmetric position (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 is for inserting a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear mounting portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the rear side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage port 314.

The guide protrusion 317 is a rail-like portion for guiding the rotation of the first gear 351 and is provided as a protrusion having an annular shape in a front view so as to project from the front of the gear mounting portion 312. A guide recess 351e, which is annular in a front view and corresponds to the guide portion 317, is provided on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. The rotational position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is arranged at a position (an eccentric position) where the passage opening 314 is displaced downward from the center in a circular area in front view formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. The fastened portions 315 are arranged on the left and right sides of the passage opening 314, and the insertion portion 316 is arranged above the passage opening 314. Accordingly, as will be described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be secured while efficiently securing a space for fastening and fixing in a limited space.

In the gear mounting portion 312, a shaft portion 318 is projectingly provided in a concave portion in which the second gear 352 is stored. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352 a formed at the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing the second gear 352 with a retaining member at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted into the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

On the back surface of the gear mounting portion 312, the drive motor 340 is arranged at a position corresponding to the concave portion in which the third gear 353 is housed. The drive motor 340 is arranged with its drive shaft 340a protruding in front of the gear mounting portion 312 (in the concave portion in which the third gear 353 is housed), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. It

The decoration base 320 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a board portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted on the front side, and a front surface of the board portion 321 and a plurality of front surfaces of the board portion 321. And a partition section 322 for partitioning into a region.

More specifically, the partitioning portion 322 is provided along the inner edge and the outer edge of the base plate portion 321 with an annular inner edge rib 322a and an outer edge rib 322b extending in a front view, and a predetermined interval between the ribs 322a and 322b. An annular intermediate rib 322c, which is concentrically formed in a front view, and a plurality of radial ribs 322d, which extend radially outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c, are arranged in a lattice pattern. Is arranged. The plurality of radiating ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degrees in the present embodiment).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the illumination base 320, a total of 24 regions, 12 on the inner peripheral side and 12 on the outer peripheral side, are partitioned by the partitioning unit 322, and each of the partitioned regions is One or two LEDs 321a are arranged. As a result, when individually lighting or blinking each LED 321a, it is possible to increase the difference in light and shade between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the lighting or blinking, and as a result, the effect is enhanced. be able to.

The rotary member 330 includes a rotary main body 331 having an opening in the center thereof and having an annular shape in a front view, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 axially extending from an outer edge of the rotary main body 331. Formed integrally with a flexible resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed in the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and in the assembled state, the fixing member 360 is housed in the opening of the rotating body 331 (see FIG. 14 ).

Fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in this embodiment) on the back surface of the rotating body 331. The fastened portion 333 is a portion (a concave portion having an internal thread engraved on the inner circumference) to which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened. They are arranged at the same distances from the center of 331 and at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

On the front surface of the rotating body 331, a plurality of annular projections 331a to 331e, which are annularly formed in a front view and are arranged concentrically, and radiate outward from the center of the annular projections 331a to 331e. A plurality of radiating protrusions 331f extending in a straight line are projected. The plurality of radiating protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (at intervals of about 30 degrees in this embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential spacing of the radiating protrusions 331f is matched with the circumferential spacing of the radiating ribs 322d of the decorative base 320.

The rotary body 331 is formed to have a uniform thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and in the portion where the annular protrusions 331a to 331e or the radial protrusion 331f are projected, the thickness corresponding to the protrusion (thickness). The thickness dimension is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for light to pass through the portions where the protrusions 331a to 331f are provided.

In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partitioning member 322 is located at a position corresponding to the radially outermost annular protrusion 331e (a position overlapping in a front view) and the annular protrusion 331d. The intermediate ribs 322c of the partition member 322 are respectively disposed at positions next to the outer side in the radial direction and corresponding positions (positions overlapping in a front view) between the annular protrusions 331d and 331c. ..

In this manner, in the rotating member 330, the regions corresponding to the regions partitioned by the partitioning member 322 of the illumination base 320 are partitioned by the protrusions 331a to 331f, and thus the LEDs 321a of the illumination base 320 are defined. When each is individually turned on or blinked, it is possible to increase the difference in light and dark between the region related to the lighting or blinking and the region not related to the lighting or blinking, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the effect.

As described above, in the rotary member 330, the division of the region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusion 331f from the front side and increasing the thickness dimension. Accordingly, for example, it is not necessary to perform printing for partitioning an area on the front surface of the rotating member 330 or to arrange another member, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed with a single color, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to enhance the staging effect.

In the rotating member 330, the inner diameter dimension of the outer wall portion 332 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the decorative base 320, and in the assembled state, the inner wall dimension of the outer wall portion 332 is The partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is fitted in the peripheral side. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light of the LED 321a from leaking from the outer peripheral side of the partition member 322, and to efficiently irradiate the light to the front side. In addition, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332, so that the inner fitting state is achieved and the both are aligned. Can be rotated relative to each other. That is, each of the fastened portions 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with the fastening seat portion 351d (insertion hole) of the first gear 351 only by rotating the two relatively, and the radial position is adjusted. Since it is not necessary to do so, workability can be improved accordingly.

The first gear 351 has a first main body 351a that has an opening in the center and allows the fixing member 360 to be inserted into the opening, and a tooth formed on the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a. 351b, a first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a in a flange shape at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the teeth 351b, and a third flange portion thereof. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) fastening seat portions 351d protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than 351c, and the first main body 351a. And a guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19) which is provided on the back side of the gear mounting portion 312 and through which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, and the fixing member 360 is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. It is rotatably held between the fixing member 360 and the gear mounting portion 312.

Since the first gear 351 is formed by the first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first body 351a, the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c is continuously provided on the axial end surfaces of the teeth 351b, so that the rigidity of the teeth 351b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be made proper, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 351b, 352b can be improved. Further, since the first flange portion 351c also serves as a retainer for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retainer component.

The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary body 331 (rotary member 330), and is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastened portion 333 of the rotary body 331, respectively. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw that is fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion holes are at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is a position, and it is arrange|positioned in the position which becomes an unequal space|interval in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. Therefore, when the rotating member 330 is assembled to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. It is possible to avoid assembling.

In order to enable the fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 at only one phase position, the insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 are not necessarily provided at the same distances from the center of the first gear 351. It need not be provided. The insertion holes of each fastening seat portion 351 may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different distances from the center of the rotary body 331.

However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to dispose the insertion holes of the respective fastening seat portions 351 at positions having the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the fastening seat portions 351d can have the same length dimension (overhang length), when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, its moldability can be improved. is there.

Here, in order to fasten and fasten the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 through the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form the opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement loci of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. However, according to the present embodiment, the movement trajectories of the respective insertion holes can be the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be suppressed to the minimum.

The second gear 352 includes a second main body 352a having a circular shape in a front view, teeth 352b formed on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed at the center of the second main body 352a. When the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c, the gear mounting portion 312 is rotatably held while being meshed with the first gear 351.

The third gear 353 includes a third main body 353a having a circular shape when viewed from the front, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side of the third gear 353 (rotating member 330) with respect to the teeth 353b. Side), and a third flange portion 353c protruding in a flange shape from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held by the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340 in a state of being meshed with the second gear 352.

Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven to rotate the third gear 353, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is changed to the first rotation. It is transmitted to the first gear 351 and the first gear 351 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotary member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotary member 330 is rotated.

As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed by the third flange portion 353c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a. Therefore, the third gear 353c is formed by the third flange portion 353c. The rigidity of can be increased. Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the third flange portion 353c is continuously provided on the axial end surfaces of the teeth 353b, the rigidity of the teeth 353b can be increased. As a result, the meshing state with the second gear 352 can be made proper, the transmission efficiency can be improved, and the durability of the teeth 353b, 352b can be improved. Further, since the third flange portion 353c also serves as a retainer for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to omit the retainer component and reduce the component cost accordingly.

The fixing member 360 is a cylindrical member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear mounting portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The receiving opening 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning opening 64 when mounted on the game board 13, and guides the sphere that has flowed in from the first winning opening 64 to the passage opening 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw that fastens or inserts the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear mounting portion 312.

18A is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the fixing member 360. In addition, in FIG. 18A, a state in which the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353 are arranged in the case body 310 is illustrated, and one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is illustrated. The part is partially sectioned.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage opening 314 formed in the gear mounting portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 as described above (see FIG. a) Displaced (eccentric) on the lower side. Therefore, in the gear mounting portion 312, in the annular region formed around the passage opening 314, the width dimension above the passage opening 314 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18A) is smaller than the width dimension below the passage opening 314. Widened.

Similarly, with respect to the fixing member 360 which is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, similarly, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is located below the center of the fixing member 360 ( The position is shifted (eccentric) in the lower side of FIG. 18B. Therefore, in the fixing member 360, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the width dimension above the receiving port 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) is wider than the lower width dimension. To be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage opening 314 and the reception opening 361 are displaced (eccentric), and a wide (enlarged width) portion is formed in a part of the periphery (annular region) thereof. Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are arranged (drilled) in the widened portions, respectively, the limited space can be effectively utilized to form a large-diameter hole, and even in such a case, the case body 310 can be formed. Also, the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be secured.

That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. Since it is a part and the weight to be supported is large, a large-diameter fastening screw is inserted, so it must be formed as a relatively large-diameter hole. By forming the (increased) portion, a space for forming a large-diameter hole can be efficiently secured by utilizing such a portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is formed, the rigidity can be ensured because the hole is formed in the partially widened region.

FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the support structure of the case body 310 for the first gear 351, the second gear 352, and the third gear 353, which corresponds to the direction of arrow XIX in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 19, the case body 310 is viewed in cross section, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide convex portion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the guide concave portion 351e provided on the rear surface side. R. Further, the first gear 351 is restricted by the fixing member 360 that is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312 from dropping off from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19 ). On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340. As a method of fixing, for example, a method of press-fitting or a method of using an adhesive is exemplified.

In the second gear 352, the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a, so that the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 have teeth 351b of the first gear 351 and the teeth 351b of the third gear 353. , 353b in mesh with each other, are rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312.

In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 include the first flange portion 351c and the third flange 351c that project radially outward from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first body 351a and the third body 353a. Each of the portions 353c is formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c are extended to a position overlapping the axial end surface of the second gear 352. As a result, the second gear 352 can be restrained from slipping out in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19) from the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose a retaining component at the tip of the shaft portion 318, so that the number of components can be reduced and the component cost can be reduced. In addition, at the time of assembly, for the second gear 352, it suffices to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the step of attaching the retaining component can be omitted. Can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 come into contact with the second gear 352 at two different locations, so that the second gear 352 moves in the axial direction. Not only can it be reliably prevented from slipping out, but also such second gear 352 can be prevented from rotating while inclining with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, the meshing state between the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b, 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 can be made appropriate, and transmission efficiency and durability can be improved. In particular, the two positions that are in contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions where the phases are different by about 180 degrees, so that the above-described effect can be more remarkably exhibited. The phases at the two locations are preferably set within the range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

Here, it suffices for the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 to be projected to the peak side rather than the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because, if the teeth 351b and the teeth 353 are extended beyond the valleys, they can come into contact with the crest-side end surfaces of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352. In addition, it is possible to suppress the material required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c, thereby achieving weight reduction and material cost reduction. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project further radially outward than the crest side of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30.

The composite operation unit 400 includes the four members (operation members 491 and 492) as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of the members (operation members 491 and 492). It consists of four units. That is, in the front view of the rear case 210, the combined operation unit 400 includes two units that are vertically arranged on the left side of the opening 211a and two units that are vertically arranged on the right side of the opening 211a. It consists of two units. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for moving (displacement) each member (moving member 491, 492) is the same in each of the four units. Therefore, in the following, one unit of these four units will be described. (A unit arranged on the upper right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be described as a combined operation unit 400.

FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the combined operation unit 400, operation members 491 and 492 are arranged on the front surface side of the mounting base 410, and the operation members 491 and 492 are made to perform the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation in combination (see FIG. 27). That is, the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged so as to face each other in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the operation members are parallel to each other. An operation of rotating as a center (rotation operation) is formed to be executable. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is provided on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

In the present embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) of the operation members 491 and 492 are formed so that one drive motor 430 can execute them. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motor 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. The detailed configuration of this structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled combined motion unit 400 as viewed from the front. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400 in a state in which a part of the composite operation unit 400 is disassembled. The configuration illustrated on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed from the front and illustrated on the right side of FIG. 22. The configuration is rear-viewed. 21 and 22, the illustration of the decorative member 411 is omitted, and in FIG. 22, the illustration of the mounting base 410 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 mounted on the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420 thereof. A plurality of gears that are rotatably supported on the back side, a drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the plurality of gears, and a rear arm whose base end is rotatably supported on a holding case 420. The body 471 and the front arm body 472, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483, which are narrowed between the opposing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and The 1st pinion leg member 482 and the operating members 491 and 492 connected to the tip of the 2nd pinion leg member 483 are mainly provided.

The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 that is attached to the mounting base 410 and a front case body 422 that faces the front side of the back case body 421. The back case body 421 and the front case body 422 include A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and housed in an internal space formed between the facing members.

In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 421, and three rotary shafts (the reduction shaft 425, the first reduction shaft 425, and the first reduction shaft 425 are provided between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422 facing each other. The 1st shaft 426 and the 2nd shaft 427 are each installed in a posture in which they are parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported by the second shaft 427 from these reduction shafts 425. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

The plurality of gears include a reduction gear 441 pivotally supported by a reduction shaft 425, an opening/closing first gear 451 and a rotating first gear 461 pivotally supported by a first shaft 426, and an opening/closing pivotally supported by a second shaft 427. It comprises a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b that is integrally formed coaxially with the large-diameter gear 441a and transmits the rotation of the pinion gear 431 to the opening/closing first gear 451 while decelerating the rotation. .. Here, the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462. The opening/closing first gear 451 has a main body portion 451a, an insertion hole 451b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 451a and into which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and the entire circumference of the outer periphery of the main body portion 451a with the insertion hole 451b as the center. The tooth 451c provided, a pair of connecting projections 451d projecting from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 451a and sandwiching the insertion hole 451b, and penetratingly formed in the main body 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. The positioning hole 451e is located.

The rotating first gear 461 is a gear which is disposed on the front side of the opening/closing first gear 451 and is pivotally supported by the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) together with the opening/closing first gear 451. And an insertion hole 461b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 461a and through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, teeth 461c carved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 461a around the insertion hole 461b, and the main body portion 451a. A pair of connecting holes 461d that are formed so as to penetrate therethrough and are located with the insertion hole 461b interposed therebetween, and a detected portion 461e that is formed to project radially outward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 451a and that is detected by an optical sensor.

In the main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461, the outer peripheral surface of the area excluding the area where the teeth 461c are formed (that is, the teeth 461c is not formed) is a cylindrical surface whose center is the axis of the insertion hole 461b (hereinafter "Cylindrical surface 461a1"). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (the distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the root circle of the tooth 461c. Thereby, as described later, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-forming surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotating second gear 462 at the same time.

In addition, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 are respectively formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so that they can be fitted in the rotating first gear 461. The rotation position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and integrally rotated in the same phase.

The opening/closing second gear 452 has a main body portion 452a, an insertion hole 452b penetratingly formed through the main body portion 452a and into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 452a centered on the insertion hole 452b. The tooth 452c is provided, a connecting protrusion 452d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 452a, and a positioning hole 452e penetratingly formed in the main body 452a.

The opening/closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 sandwiched between the back case body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471), and the pivotal support of the back arm body 471 is provided. An insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by a cylindrical portion erected along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the second opening/closing gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 via this connection (FIG. 26).

The rotating second gear 462 includes a main body 462a, an insertion hole 462b penetratingly formed through the main body 462a and into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a part of the outer periphery of the main body 462a with the insertion hole 462b as the center. A tooth 462c to be provided, a pair of connecting projections 462d that project from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body portion 462a and have a hole formed therethrough, and a positioning hole 462e that is formed to penetrate the main body portion 452a. Equipped with.

The main body portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is provided on both sides of the tooth 462c and has an outer peripheral surface (hereinafter referred to as "non-forming surface 462a1") in a region where the tooth is not formed on the side of the insertion hole 462b. It is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward (that is, has a center of curvature on the radially outer side). Specifically, the curvature of the non-formation surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

Further, the rotating second gear 462 is arranged on the front side of the opening/closing second gear 452 (posture in the axial direction), but in a state independent of the opening/closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). The second shaft 427 is pivotally supported in a relatively rotatable state. In addition, the rotating second gear 462 is fastened to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d, thereby connecting the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e to each other. The two are connected. Therefore, the second rotating gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase via the connection.

In this way, since the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462, both of them are connected via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in this embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotating second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

As will be described later, the rotating second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (see FIG. 28 to FIG. 30), it is necessary to secure rigidity to resist the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotating second gear 462 is made thicker, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases.

On the other hand, according to the rotating second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472), the rigidity can be increased. It is not necessary to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or adopt a high-rigidity material. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the rotating second gear 462 while reducing the weight and cost of the rotating second gear 462.

In particular, the rotating second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween in the back side of the non-forming surface 462a1. 28 to FIG. 30), as will be described later, when the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear The rigidity of the portion of 461 that receives a reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased by using the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or a fastening screw made of metal. As a result, the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462 and the improvement in durability thereof can be further achieved at the same time.

The gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452. Therefore, as described later, when the rotating first gear 461 is rotated by the unit rotation angle, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated by the same rotation angle as the unit opening and closing first gear 451 is rotated. When the rotation is performed, the rotation angle is matched with the rotation angle of the second rotating gear 462.

It returns to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 and demonstrates. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430 is meshed with the large diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441, and the small diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the opening/closing first gear 451. The open/close second gear 451 is meshed with the open/close second gear 452, and the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the opening/closing first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated.

In this case, as described above, since the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the inner fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d into the connecting hole 461d, they can rotate integrally in the same phase. To be done. That is, when the opening/closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation also rotates the rotating first gear 461, the opening/closing first gear 451 rotates to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the rotating first gear 461 rotates. Each is transmitted to the second gear 462.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent of each other and can be relatively rotated in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 causes the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 to rotate integrally, while the rotation driving force is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the rotation first A state in which the rotational driving force is cut off can be formed on the second gear 462. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening/closing operation is executed. The details of the structure and operation will be described later.

Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 at the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, corresponding to these positioning holes 421a, 421b, positioning holes 410a, 410b are also formed through the mounting base 410. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is arranged to communicate with the positioning hole 421a and the positioning hole 410b is arranged to communicate with the positioning hole 421b.

In this embodiment, by inserting cylindrical jigs into the positioning holes 421a, 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e, 462e of the gears 451, 452, 462, the gears 451 and 452 for the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462, and the phase (rotational position) between the rotating first gear 461 and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 and the opening/closing second gear 452. it can. The method of such positioning will be described later.

The rear arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 to the operation members 491, 492 together with the front arm body 472, and rotating the operation members 491, 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a into which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) insertion holes 471b into which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted, a first pinion leg member 482, and a second pinion. A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) shaft portions 471c that rotatably support the leg members 483, respectively, and linearly extend along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 as concave grooves having a U-shaped cross section. A guide groove 471d and a positioning hole 471e penetratingly formed laterally of the shaft support hole 471a.

A collar 427a provided in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a, whereby the back arm body 471 is rotatable about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case body 421. It Further, the cylindrical portion forming the shaft supporting hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening/closing gear 452, and the second opening/closing gear 452 is rotatable by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. Is pivotally supported.

The positioning holes 471e are formed at positions corresponding to the positioning holes 462 of the rotating second gear 462 and the positioning holes 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452, respectively. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the rotary second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 is joined. The positioning hole 471e and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462 are aligned in phase (rotational position about the second shaft 427). On the other hand, in the opening/closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the rear arm body 471. When relatively rotated with respect to 471 and arranged at a predetermined rotational position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452 is positioned relative to the positioning hole 471e of the rear arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462. , Their phases (rotational positions about the second shaft 427) are matched.

The front arm body 472 has a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and a fastening screw that is protruded toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted through the through hole 471b of the back arm body 471. (Four in this embodiment) raised fastening portions 472b formed in the above, a plurality (four in this embodiment) receiving recesses 472c that are recesses that can receive the tip of the shaft portion 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. Guide groove 472d linearly extending along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a rectangular groove, and connected to the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 which is arranged so as to sandwich the shaft support hole 472a ( And a connecting protrusion 472e that is fastened and fixed).

A collar 422a arranged on the front case body 422 is inserted in the shaft support hole 472a, whereby the front arm body 472 is rotatable about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. It That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotating second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotating second gear 462 receives the rotational driving force from the rotating first gear 461 to generate the second arm. When rotated about the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) together with the rotating second gear 462 also rotate about the second shaft 427.

The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are fastened to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472 by fastening screws that are inserted into the insertion holes 471b of the back arm body 471, so that the front arm of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 471. The body 472 and the back surface of the body 472 are coupled so as to face each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the facing surfaces (front surface and back surface) of the two. Therefore, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be displaceably disposed by using this gap.

The slide rack member 481 transmits, together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483, the rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452 to the operating members 491 and 492 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and is formed of a long body portion 481a, rack portions 481b formed as rack gears on both left and right sides of the body portion 481a, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 481a. The connecting groove 481c is provided with a guide protrusion 481d protruding from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 481 in a substantially rectangular cross section and extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

As described above, the connection groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove into which the connection protrusion 452d of the opening/closing second gear 452 is inserted, and has a groove width with which the connection protrusion 452d can slide and the main body 481. Is linearly extended along a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the. In the assembled state of the slide rack member 481, the guide convex portion 481d is inserted into the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). Direction) (see FIG. 26).

The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 include body portions 482a and 483a, shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through one end of the body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction, and shaft support holes 482b thereof. , 483b as a pinion gear, and gear holes 482c, 483c formed as pinion gears, and connecting holes 482d, 483d penetratingly formed at the other longitudinal ends of the body parts 482a, 483a. The gear portions 482c and 483c are arranged on both left and right sides of the 481 in a state of being meshed with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

The shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes in which the shaft portion 471c of the rear arm body 471 is inserted and supported in the assembled state, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are It is rotatable with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 about the shaft support holes 482b and 483b (the shaft portion 471c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 with respect to the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second arm portion 482c and the gear portions 482c and 483c are engaged with each other. The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

A plurality of operating members 491, 492 are formed in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface side thereof and are formed so as to be inserted into the connecting holes 482d, 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in this embodiment). ) The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are provided. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are inserted into the connecting holes 482d and 483d, and the fastening screws are fastened to the protruding tips from the side opposite to the insertion direction, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 The operation members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

In addition, the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with a rib-shaped portion projecting on the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tip thereof, and the end surface of the rib-shaped portion has the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It is brought into contact with the front surface of the leg member 483. Accordingly, the operating members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protrusion height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in the structure in which the front arm body 472 is arranged between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 and the operating members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the front arm body 472. It is possible to open and close the operation members 491 and 492 without doing so.

An urging spring 484 composed of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 is The first pinion leg members 482 are configured to act in a direction in which they approach each other. Thus, when the operating members 491, 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491, 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. Can be suppressed.

Next, a method of positioning the opening/closing first gear 451, the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461, and the rotating second gear 462 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. 21 to 23 will be appropriately referred to in the description of the positioning method.

FIGS. 24 and 25 explain a process of assembling the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in a time series. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged front view of the combined operation unit 400. Note that the state in which the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425 in FIG. 24(a) is further opened and closed by the first shaft 426 in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 24(a) in FIG. 24(b). In the state in which the first gear 451 is assembled, in FIG. 25(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are further assembled to the second shaft 427 in the state illustrated in FIG. 24(b). 25B, the state in which the rotating first gear 461 is further attached to the first shaft 426 is illustrated in FIG. 25B with respect to the state illustrated in FIG. 25A.

Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 via the reduction gear 441, thereby opening/closing the opening/closing second gear 452. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open/close the operating members 491, 492, and the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 via the reduction gear 441. By sequentially transmitting the rotation second gear 462, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated, and the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated.

Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491, 492 (that is, avoid the interference between the members and the occurrence of the deviation of the moving range), the opening/closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451. The rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the second rotating gear and the rotational position of the second rotating gear 462 with respect to the first rotating gear 461 are respectively positioned at predetermined rotating positions, and then the respective gears 451 to 462 are held in the holding case. It is necessary to be attached to each 420.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to assemble these two gears after positioning the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear, the operator must rotate both gears. Since it was necessary to visually adjust the position and to assemble, the work was complicated, work efficiency was poor, and there was a risk of defective assembly.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotational position (phase, meshing position) of each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, and each of these rotational positions. A positioning structure for locating the mounting positions (phases) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided. By using this positioning structure, when assembling each gear 451-462 to the holding case 420, While improving the workability, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly failure.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410 communicate with the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421, respectively. , 410b are respectively inserted with jigs (not shown), and the jigs are projected from the positioning holes 421a, 421b to the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a or the like.

Next, the opening/closing first gear 451 is assembled (supported) to the first shaft 426 while inserting the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 into the positioning hole 451e of the opening/closing first gear 451. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening/closing first gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening/closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. ..

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening/closing first gear 451), the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are then moved to the first position. It is attached to the shaft 427 (supported).

The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, in the opening/closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the rear arm body 471, and in the rotating second gear 462, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is the connecting protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The second opening/closing gear 452 and the second rotating gear 462 are provided between the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in a state of being fastened and fixed to the front arm body 472. The jig inserted into the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 is projected from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the second rotating gear 462.

In this case, the assembling of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 to the second shaft 427 requires that the jig projecting from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421 is moved to the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the opening/closing first gear. The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are assembled (axially supported) to the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted into the positioning hole 452e of the second gear 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotating second gear 462. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the opening/closing second gear 452 meshes with the opening/closing first gear 451, and the rotational position (phase, meshing position) of the opening/closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening/closing first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

Lastly, while maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to this back case body 421 (at least the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), the opening and closing first axis 426 is pivotally supported. The rotating first gear 461 is assembled (axially supported) on the first shaft 426 while inserting the connecting protrusion 451d of the first gear 451 into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating first gear 461. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotating first gear 461 is meshed with the rotating second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotating second gear 462 to the back case body 421 is positioned. You can

After the rotating first gear 461 is attached (axially supported) to the first shaft 426, the jig is pulled out from the back side of the back case body 421. As a result, the assembly (axial support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427) is completed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the jigs are erected in parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the jigs are inserted into the positioning holes 451e, etc. Positioning rotational positions (phases, meshing positions) of the gears 451 to 462 with the back case body 421 as a reference by sequentially assembling (supporting) the 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, etc. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time when the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, and the workability is improved. Can be planned.

Particularly, regarding the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, since the positioning hole 452e of the opening/closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, the second shaft of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 is formed. Assembly (shaft support) to 427 can be performed at the same time. Particularly, in this embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the rear arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the second opening/closing gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are integrated with the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Can be assembled (supported) on the second shaft 427. Therefore, it is not necessary to assemble the respective arm bodies 471, 472 and the respective gears 452, 462 while positioning them, and the positioning work can be completed by one assembly work, and the workability thereof can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare dedicated jigs for the opening/closing second gear 452, the rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore,
The opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently of each other. However, if the jig is removed to the rear side of the back case body 421, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 452 are removed. 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a rotating shaft for each of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are used as a common rotating shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced also from this point.

On the other hand, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and integrally rotatable in the same phase. In this case, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are formed by inserting (interfitting) the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. The two gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other to enable positioning of their rotational positions (phases) and integral rotation in the same phase at the same time. That is, the rotational position (phase) of both gears 451 and 461 and the coupling of both gears 451 and 461 for integral rotation can be shared by the coupling projection 451d and the communication hole 461d. It is not necessary to separately provide a through hole for positioning (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shapes of both gears 451 and 461 can be simplified and the manufacturing yield can be improved. Moreover, since the number of through holes formed penetrating the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, the rigidity can be secured by that amount and the durability can be improved.

In particular, a pair of communication holes 461d are formed as through holes in the rotating first gear 461, and a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 are inserted (internally fitted) into the pair of communication holes 461d. ), the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, the jig is projected from the front surface of the back case body 421, and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially positioned while positioning the rotational position using the jig. Assembling (supporting) the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, etc., the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after all the gears 451 to 462 have been assembled. That is, when assembling the gears 451 to 462, respectively, while maintaining the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e to 462e of the gears 451 to 462, which are already assembled, of the gears 451 to 462, respectively. The remaining gears 451 to 461 of the gears 451 to 462 can be assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker from inadvertently rotating the already assembled gears 451 to 461 during the work, so that the workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotational position can be improved. It is possible to improve the sex.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are coaxially arranged on the first shaft 426, and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are coaxially arranged on the second shaft 427, respectively. Therefore, the backlash between the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 and the backlash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. .. As a result, as will be described later, when performing the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 (see FIGS. 27 to 30), it is possible to suppress the production timing from deviating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, an opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 will be described. 26(a) to 26(c) are exploded front views of the combined operation unit 400 for explaining the relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. The state where the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is shown. 26(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 26(b), and FIG. 26(c) is opening/closing with respect to FIG. 26(b). The second gear 452 corresponds to the state of being respectively rotated clockwise (clockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening/closing gear 452. As a result, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotatable relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged toward each other by the urging force of the urging springs 484 (see FIG. 22) installed between them. A shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the biasing force of the biasing spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side in FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated counterclockwise, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side in FIG. 26B is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 is guided by the biasing force of the biasing spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 to guide the guide recesses 471d and 472d of the arm bodies 471 and 472 (see FIGS. 21 and 22). (Refer to FIG. 26B), the slide is displaced downward (in the direction away from the second opening/closing second gear 452, the lower side in FIG. 26B ).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the second opening/closing gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the second opening/closing gear 452 has its connecting projection 452d slid. The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the sliding displacement direction (the vertical direction of FIG. 26B) is drawn to the lower side (the lower side of FIG. 26B) by the rack member 481 and is the distance L1. .. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between the connecting holes 482d is the distance W1.

When the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves the slide rack member 481 upward (upward in FIG. 26A) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace the slide.

That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26A). The distance between the two is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the interval between the connection holes 482d is enlarged to the interval W2. (W1<W2).

Note that the pair of second pinion leg members 483 is similar to the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26( b ), postures close to each other (interval between the connecting holes 483 d 26A, and in the state shown in FIG. 26A, as the slide rack member 481 slides upward, the postures (the intervals between the connecting holes 483d are set to the maximum) are separated from each other. Will be placed).

When the open/close second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26A, the state shown in FIG. Will be returned to. When the opening/closing second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 26B, the connecting protrusion 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides the slide rack member 481 upward (upward in FIG. 26C) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace. As a result, as in the case shown in FIG. 26A, when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to the predetermined rotation position, as shown in FIG. 26C, the sliding displacement direction (FIG. 26C ) The distance between the coupling groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid and displaced upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. It With the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg members 483) are rotated in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the gap between the connecting holes 482d is increased. The interval is expanded to the interval W2 (W1<W2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 27 to FIG. 30, a rotating operation and an opening/closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the combined operation unit 400 will be described.

27A to 27D are front views of the combined operation unit 400 showing the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491 and 492 in time series. 27(a), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened, whereas in FIG. 27(b) the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed. 27(c), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and are closed. In FIG. 27(d), the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the lowered position D. The open state is shown respectively.

28 to 30 are combined operation units schematically showing the meshing state of the open/close first gear 451 and the open/close second gear 452 and the meshing state of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of 400. Note that FIG. 28(a) is in the state of FIG. 27(a), FIG. 28(b) and FIG. 29(a) is in the state of FIG. 27(b), and FIG. 29(b) is in the state of FIG. 27(b). 27(c) and 30(a) correspond to the state of FIG. 27(c), and FIG. 30(b) corresponds to the state of FIG. 27(d). To do. 28(b) and FIG. 29(a) and FIG. 29(c) and FIG. 30(a) show the same state.

Here, in FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line. 28 to 30, one connecting projection 451d of the pair of connecting projections 451d of the opening/closing first gear 451 and one connecting hole of the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 are shown. 461d is shown with hatching, and the hatched connecting projection 451d and connecting hole 461d will be described as a reference of rotation angles θ0 to θ4 described later. That is, in the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 462, the hatched connecting protrusion 451d is inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d, and these are arranged at the same rotation position.

28 to 30, rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 in a state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the raised position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The position is the rotation angle θ0 and the rotation positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 in the state in which the operating members 491, 492 are arranged in the raised position U and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The opening/closing first gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged between the ascending position U and the descending position D and closed (the state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). 451 and the rotating first gear 461 with respect to the rotation angle θ2, and the opening/closing first gear 451 in a state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C), The rotation position of the rotation first gear 461 is set to the rotation angle θ3, and the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 in the state where the operation members 491 and 492 are arranged in the lowered position D and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27D). The rotation position of the first gear 461 is defined as a rotation angle θ4.

As shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, when the rotational positions of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operating members 491 and 492 are set to the rising position U. It is placed and opened. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 to a predetermined rotation position, and the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. By reducing the distance between the distances to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) and brought into a state (a state shown in FIG. 26C).

In this case, in the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, the non-forming surface 462a1 in the body portion 462a of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 in the body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461. .. As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centering on the first shaft 426, and the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b side (that is, the center of curvature is on the first shaft 426 side), and has the same curvature as or a little the same as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461. It is formed as a curved surface having a small curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

Therefore, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 causes the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462). It is impossible to rotate around. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 serve as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491, 492 at the raised position U). Can be operated.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine, an operating member that is rotatably disposed and a drive motor that applies a rotational driving force to the operating member are provided, and the operating member is rotated in a predetermined manner by the rotational driving force of the driving motor. There are things that rotate within a range. In this case, for example, when the terminating end of the rotation range of the operating member is set to the raised position and gravity acts on the operating member arranged at the end of the rotating range, the operating member rotates (falls) due to the action of gravity. You need to avoid it. However, in the conventional game machine, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to the gravity (weight of the operating member) to restrict the rotation (lowering) of the operating member (that is, the operating member is held at the end of the rotation range). ), the energy consumption required for holding the operating member is high.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body 461a) and the rotating second By contacting the non-forming surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body 462a), the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (rotational movement of the second rotating gear 462) can be restricted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (up position U), the operating members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated, so that the drive motor When it becomes impossible to hold the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U using the rotational driving force, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 is used to move the operating members 491, 492 to the raised position U. Can be retained. As a result, the energy consumption required to hold the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) contact each other (that is, the operating member 491, When the 492 is arranged in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 around the second shaft 427 in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise) can be restricted. Since the second rotation gear 462 rotates in only one direction about the second shaft 427 (that is, the movement members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowered position D by the action of gravity). Compared with the case where it is formed into a shape that can be regulated by only (), the vibrations of the operating members 491, 492 when the end of the movement range (the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)) is reached are converged. The operating members 491 and 492 can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range. Furthermore, since the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the operating members 491 and 492 that should be in the stopped state in the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later) have an external force (for example, It is possible to suppress vibration and displacement due to external force generated by the player hitting or rocking the game machine.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 are arranged in the ascending position U (and in a descending position D described later), the arc shape is curved about the rotation axis (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461, The rotary first gear 461 is curved and formed in an arc shape having the same diameter as or a slightly larger diameter than the cylindrical surface 461a1.

As a result, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into surface contact with each other. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are brought into smooth contact with each other, and the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (the rising position U (and the lowering position D described later)) and are stopped. The impact at the time can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 can be reduced to improve the durability of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462.

Here, the second rotating gear 462 has its rigidity increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) as described above. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a high-rigidity material, and thus the weight of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced and the cost can be reduced while the durability of the rotating second gear 462 can be improved. It is being improved.

In particular, as described above, the rotating second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the rear surface side of the non-forming surface 462a1 (that is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween). ), the rotation of the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461. The rigidity of the portion of the first gear 461 that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 can be effectively increased. As a result, the weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotating second gear 462 and the improvement in durability thereof can be further achieved at the same time.

Further, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is arranged at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-forming surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formation surface 462a1 is arranged on the straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426. When the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 at the raised position U (and the lowered position D described later), the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 is contacted. Since the reaction force received from the rotary second gear is applied along the straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426, the rotary second gear is located at a position facing the rotary shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotary first gear 461. By providing the connecting protrusion 462d of 462, the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the first rotating gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) by using the front arm body 472 can be further exerted. Further, since the metal fastening screw is inserted into the rolling protrusion 462d, the rigidity can be increased in that respect as well.

From the state shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, rotation occurs. Since the first gear 461 and the second rotating gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotating gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462, the first rotating gear The rotational driving force is not transmitted from 461 to the second rotating gear 462, and the second rotating gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the operating members 491, 492 can be held at the elevated position U without performing the rotating operation of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, in a state where the rotating operation is stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotating first gear 461, and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is faced to the cylindrical surface 461a1, so that the above-described cutoff state (rotation first Since the structure in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the first gear 461 to the second rotating gear 462 is formed, the rigidity of the first rotating gear 462 can be improved.

That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (a region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the tooth 461c. By sliding (sliding) to face each other, the above-described cutoff state can be formed. However, in this case, since the teeth 461c are formed (recessed), the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the first rotating gear 461 is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed (the tooth 451c is not formed) in the region facing the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462, the body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is correspondingly formed. The rigidity of can be improved.

When the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotating first gear 461 (a region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is different from the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461. It is necessary to be set back toward the second shaft 427 side from the tooth crest surface. As a result, the amount of retreat in the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed becomes large, and the rigidity thereof is reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotary first gear 461 is formed with the cylindrical surface 461a1, and the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed between the tooth crest surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c as described above. Therefore, the amount of retreat of the non-forming surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 can be reduced. Thereby, the protrusion amount of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462 is secured (the increase of the backward movement amount is suppressed), and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the second rotating gear 462 is increased. Can be improved.

In particular, the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 side (that is, the center of curvature is on the first shaft 426 side) as described above, and the tooth 462c. From the second shaft 427, the cylindrical surface of the rotating first gear 461 has a shape protruding toward the front side (the rotating first gear 461 side) as it is separated from the peripheral direction. It is possible to increase the amount of protrusion in the portion where the non-formation surface 462a1 of the second rotating gear 462 is formed while allowing sliding (formation of a blocking state) with respect to 461a1 and to further increase its rigidity.

Since the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 are meshed with each other, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 have the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461. Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the opening/closing second gear 452 causes the rear arm body 471 and It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the front arm body 472 about the second shaft 427.

As a result, the distance between the coupling groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is expanded to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27B, 28B, and 29A, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be brought into a closed state. That is, while the operating members 491, 492 are held in the raised position U, the opening/closing operation can be executed to close the opened operating members 491, 492.

As shown in FIGS. 27(b), 28(b) and 29(a), the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491 and 492 move to the raised position U. In the state in which the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are arranged in the closed state. 462c is set to a state immediately before meshing.

Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3. When rotated toward the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462, the teeth of the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 are meshed with each other so that the rotation first gear 461 and the rotation second gear 462 mesh with each other. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 is integrally rotated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 to rotate clockwise (clockwise) about the second shaft 427. .. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is possible to rotate the operating members 491 and 492 from the raised position U to the lowered position D.

On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the open/close first gear 451 and the open/close second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ1 toward the rotating angle θ3, the opening/closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are also the same. It is rotated integrally in phase. That is, the opening/closing second gear 452 is not relatively rotated with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29B, the rotating second gear 462 and the back arm body 471. The front arm body 472 is integrally rotated about the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 can be stopped (the operating members 491, 492 can be held in the closed state).

As a result, when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the operating members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state, and the rotating operation is performed to open and close the opening/closing first gear 451. As the gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, as shown in FIGS. 27C and 29C, the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the ascending position U are moved to the descending position D. Can be placed at.

As shown in FIGS. 27(c), 29(c), and 30(a), the operating members 491 and 492 are operated when the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated up to the rotation angle θ3. It is placed in the lowered position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are released from each other, and the rotating second gear 462 is attached to the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body 461a of the rotating first gear 461. The non-formed surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a is brought into contact.

That is, the mutual engagement of the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 with each other is canceled (making the meshing impossible), so that the rotating first gear 461 moves to the rotating second gear 462. The rotation of the rotation second gear 462 (that is, the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492) can be stopped by interrupting the transmission of the rotational driving force to the rotor (forming the interrupted state).

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the stop of the operating member is provided with a sensor device that detects the rotational position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operating member, and the sensor device causes the gear to reach a predetermined rotational position. When the rotation is detected, or when the drive amount (rotation number or step number) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operating members move. The drive of the drive motor was stopped when it was judged that the end of the range had been reached. In this case, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member reaches the end of the moving range due to, for example, detection failure of the rotational position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper when the drive motor is not stopped properly. However, in the structure in which the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper as described above, when the operating member collides with the stopper, not only the operating member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. This may cause damage to the drive motor.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (down position D), the meshing of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is made. It is possible to release (make meshing impossible) to interrupt the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operating members 491 and 492 (the second rotary gear 462). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped even when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is being continuously generated.

As a result, it is possible to avoid damage due to collision between the operating members 491 and 492 and other members. Further, even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are separated from each other). Since the drive motor 430 is idling, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive load to the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies when the operating members 491, 492 are rotated from the lowered position D toward the raised position U and reach the raised position U.

As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-forming surface 462a1 causes the second shaft 427 of the rotating second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotating second gear 462). It is impossible to rotate around. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to restrict the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, to hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D). Can function as.

From the state shown in FIG. 27C, FIG. 29C, and FIG. 30A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in phase with each other from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 slide (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotating first gear 461 to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. This makes it possible to stop the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D).

On the other hand, since the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452 are meshed with the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the opening/closing second gear 452, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 451 are rotated. When the gear 461 is integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4, the rotation of the opening/closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening/closing second gear 452, and the opening/closing second gear 452 causes the rear arm body to rotate. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to 471 and the front arm body 472.

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction approaching the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26C). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the operating members 491 and 492 that have been closed can be brought into the opened state. That is, while the operating members 491, 492 are held in the lowered position D, the opening/closing operation can be performed to open the closed operating members 491, 492.

As shown in FIGS. 27(d) and 30(b), after the operating members 491 and 492 are placed in the lowered position D and are in the opened state, the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is then moved. By rotating the first opening/closing first gear 451 and the first rotating gear 461 integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 toward the rotation angle θ0. Operations (opening/closing operation and rotating operation) can be executed in reverse order.

That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27D and 30B, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ3. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27(c), 29(c) and 30(a), the slippage between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. By using (sliding), the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 is stopped (that is, the operating members 491, 492 are held in the lowered position D), and the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). ), the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be expanded to the distance L1 and the operating members 491 and 492 that have been opened can be brought into a closed state. That is, while the operating members 491, 492 are held at the lowered position D, the opening/closing operation can be executed to close the opened operating members 491, 492.

Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIGS. 27C, 29C, and 30A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase through the rotation angle θ2. To the rotation angle θ1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27B and 29A, the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the operating member While rotating 491 and 492 from the lowered position D to the raised position U, the opening/closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and these rotating second gears 462 and The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated about the second shaft 427 in the same phase. That is, while the operating members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state, it is possible to perform the rotating operation and place the operating members 491 and 492, which are arranged in the lowered position D, in the raised position U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when starting the rotation operation for moving the operating members 491, 492 from the lowered position D to the raised position U, first, only the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed. After that, the operation members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is cut off to prevent the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 from being transmitted to the rotation second gear 462, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 430 is changed to the rotation second gear. Since the transmission state is transmitted to 462, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotational movement of the operation members 491, 492 can be suppressed, and as a result, the drive motor 430 can be downsized. be able to.

That is, when starting the rotating operation of the operating members 491, 492 in the stopped state (that is, the ascending position U or the descending position D), a stationary object is moved, so that the operating members 491, 492 are moved. It is necessary to apply a force that exceeds the generated inertial force to the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational drive force required for the drive motor 430 increases. In particular, the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 992 is not limited to the operating members 491, 492, but a mechanical portion (for example, the slide rack member 481 or each pinion leg member 482, 483) that opens and closes the operating members 491, 492. Etc.) and the respective arm bodies 471, 472, etc. that hold the mechanical parts thereof need to be moved, and the inertial force at the time of starting the rotation operation becomes large. Further, when rotating the operating members 491, 492 in the lowered position D toward the raised position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (the action of gravity) of the operating members 491, 492 in addition to the inertial force. .. Therefore, the drive motor 430 is increased in size.

On the other hand, after the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 is started, the action of inertia acting to maintain the motion state of the operating members 491, 492 acts, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is increased. The driving force becomes smaller than the rotational driving force required when starting the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492. In other words, it can be said that after the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 is started, the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotational driving force is generated by utilizing the slip (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Is not transmitted to the rotating second gear 462 (a cutoff state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30B to FIG. 30A), the drive motor 430 can be rotationally driven, and the drive motor 430 Momentum (inertial force on the rotating first gear 461 side) can be given to the driven state. After that, the rotating first gear 461 is meshed with the rotating second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29C to FIG. 29B), The rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 can be started in a state in which the rotational drive of the drive motor 430 is given momentum. Thus, even if the drive motor 430 is downsized, the movement of the operation members 491 and 492 can be started. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotation operation of the operation members 491 and 492 is started.

Particularly, in this shut-off state, the opening/closing operation of the operating members 491, 492 is performed, but in the opening/closing operation, the only objects to be moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430 are the operating members 491, 492. As in the case of the rotating operation, it is not necessary to move the entire mechanism including the operation members 491 and 492, the mechanical portion thereof, the arm bodies 471 and 472, and the like. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and it is possible to give sufficient momentum (inertial force to the rotating first gear 461 side) to the driving state thereof.

The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 are formed on both sides with the teeth 461c and 462c sandwiched between them, and at the two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D, the cylindrical surface is formed. A state (blocking state) in which the non-formation surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 can be formed. Therefore, not only when the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 in the lowered position D to the raised position U is started, but also when the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U is started to the lowered position D. Also, it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the drive state of the drive motor 430.

From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIG. 27B, FIG. 28B and FIG. 29A, the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase to the rotation angle θ0. .. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27A and 28A, the sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is used. Then, while stopping the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 (that is, while holding the operating members 491, 492 in the raised position U), by the clockwise (clockwise) rotation of the opening/closing second gear 452, The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2 so that the operating members 491 and 492 that have been closed can be brought into the opened state. That is, it is possible to open and close the operating members 491 and 492 that are closed while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the raised position U and performing the opening/closing operation.

As described above, according to the combined operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) which are rotated (rotated) about the second shaft 427, and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated. Operating members 491 and 492 (second moving members) that are provided on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and that are opened and closed (opening and closing operations) in directions of approaching and separating from each other are provided, and the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member). While the rotating operation of the rear arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped (see FIGS. 28 and 30), the operating members 491, 492 (second moving member) The drive motor 430 can perform a combined operation of rotating the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) while the opening/closing operation of (1) is stopped.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by the one drive motor, there are a state where the drive motor generates a driving force and a state where the generation of the driving force is stopped. Since the two moving states are formed to switch the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. However, it is impossible to stop one of the first moving member and the second moving member while moving the other. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member and the second moving member while stopping the other, a drive motor for moving the first moving member and a drive motor for moving the second moving member are used. It was necessary to provide each individually, that is, to provide two drive motors in total.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the operating members 491, 492 (second moving member) or the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode to be stopped can be achieved by the one drive motor 430, while reducing the required number of the drive motors 430 while increasing the effect of moving and stopping the operation members 491 and 492, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

Next, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 32 is FIG. 9 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. The arrangement positions (opposing intervals) of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 are in the state where both the units 500 and 600 are accommodated in the rear case 210. It corresponds to the installation position (opposing interval).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engaging member 539 that is vertically movable via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 includes a link. A pair of second coupling members 630 are formed so as to be swingable to the left and right via a mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 at a predetermined interval. The third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side (the back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 31 and 32) of the space located between the facings of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600. Is set up.

The first combination operation unit 500 and the second combination operation unit 600 move up and down and swing the first engagement member 539 and the pair of second connection members 630, respectively, so as to move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or shown in FIG. Place it at the joining position. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated left and right due to the tilting of the link mechanism, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). The front side is opened (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engaging member 539 is lowered and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other due to the standing of the link mechanism. The 2 coupling members 630 are arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and are coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engaging member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side, and The lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the respective upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, so that a force in a direction of bringing them closer to each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. Accordingly, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact with each other, but also the facing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other on the left and right sides are brought into close contact with each other. Can be made. As a result, the respective coupling members 539 and 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of production by combining a plurality of members.

First, the first combination operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

33A is a front view of the first combination operation unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a bottom view of the first combination operation unit 500 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 33A. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first combined movement unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combined operation unit 500. Note that, in FIG. 35, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a driving unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generating a driving force, and a driving unit 520 thereof. And a sliding mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the base member 510, and a driving force of the driving portion 520 is transmitted to the sliding mechanism portion 530. A first link member 541 disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 and a second link member disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical to the first link member 541. 542, a pair of raising members 550 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 on both sides of the slide mechanism portion 530, a decorative portion 560 arranged on the front side of the pair of raising members 550, and a substrate. An urging spring 571 that is provided on the front side of the member 510 and applies an urging force to the second link member 542 is mainly provided.

The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with an open rear surface, and the drive unit 520 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be housed in the inner space of the raising member 550. Accordingly, as will be described later, even when the driving unit 520 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be effectively used. This can be utilized, and the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

The board member 510 is a member that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and includes a pair of guide grooves 511 and a rack portion that is juxtaposed along one guide groove 511 of the pair of guide grooves 511. 512, connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right with a pair of guide grooves 511 sandwiched therebetween, a shaft support hole 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and a front side and a rear side of the substrate member 510, respectively. A supporting shaft 516 that is provided so as to protrude is mainly provided.

The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to be inserted from the front surface side to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 so that the insertion shaft 531c and each of the link members 541 and 542 can be connected on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510. Is a groove-shaped opening, and the pair extends linearly along the up-down direction while maintaining parallel to each other substantially at the center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The groove width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can be moved (elevated) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by the insertion shaft 531c being guided by the guide groove 511.

The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512a are engraved on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. When the slide mechanism 520 is assembled to the board member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism 530 meshes with the teeth 512 a of the rack 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (elevated) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven along with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530.

The connection groove 513 has a groove shape for inserting the connection shaft 526 of the driving unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and connecting the connection shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510. And is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connection groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The groove width of the connecting groove 513 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and the connecting shaft 526 is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

The shaft support hole 515 is an opening through which the support shaft 527 that supports the base end side of the first link member 541 is inserted, and is disposed on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connection groove 513 interposed therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is a shaft support hole. It is projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported at its base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through a shaft support hole 515, and is rotated about the support shaft 527.

The connecting groove 514 allows the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 to be inserted from the rear side to the front side of the substrate member 510, and the locking claw 542b has the end portion of the biasing spring 542 formed on the front side of the substrate member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for making it extend toward the guide groove 511 while being curved in a convex arc shape. That is, the connection groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for axially supporting the second link member 542 and the biasing spring 571, and is provided on the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively, as described above. The support shaft 516 is arranged at a position line-symmetrical to the shaft support hole 515 with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetry line. The second link member 542 is pivotally supported at the base end side (shaft support hole 542a) on a support shaft 516 provided on the back side of the substrate member 510, and is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the biasing spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 that is provided so as to project on the front side of the substrate member 510.

The biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, the coil portion thereof is held (guided) by the support shaft 516, and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions is engaged with the second link member 542. It is locked by the locking claw 542b, and the other arm is locked by the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The biasing spring 571 is arranged in a state where the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction in which they approach each other, and the elastic restoring force of the biasing spring 571 pushes the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (FIG. 34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the tip end side is located at the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

The driving unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for slidingly displacing (elevating) the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction, and is on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. It is arranged. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. Note that, in FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state where the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is provided with a case body 521 and a drive motor 522 which is disposed on the front side of the case body 521 and projects the drive shaft toward the rear side of the case body 521 (FIG. 34 and FIG. 34). 35), a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotation shaft 524a which is meshed with the pinion gear 523 and is protruded from the back surface of the case body 521. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotary shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 protruding from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521. And a support shaft 527 protruding from the back surface of the. The drive shaft of the drive motor 522, the rotary shafts 524a and 525a, the connecting shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 are arranged in parallel.

A rotating shaft 525a that rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524 is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 form a crank mechanism that converts the rotational movement of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating movement of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 is extended along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Is displaced in one direction (arrow B1 direction) while the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (the arrow B2 direction) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

In the state where the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled on the front side of the substrate member 510, the connecting shaft 526 and the supporting shaft 527 are respectively connected to the connecting groove 513 and the supporting hole 515 of the substrate member 510, as described above. After being inserted, the tip ends of the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are respectively projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connecting hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft supporting hole 541a) of the first link member 541. (See FIG. 35), the connecting shaft 526 is displaced along the connecting groove 513 (arrow B1 direction or arrow B2 direction) by rotational driving of the drive motor 522, so that the first link member 541 is moved to the supporting shaft. It can be rotated around 527.

It returns to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and demonstrates. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 to transmit the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in a scale plate shape. The first link member 541 has a shaft support hole 541a formed at the base end, a connection hole 541b formed at the longitudinal middle portion, and a slide hole 541c formed at the tip end opposite to the base end.

The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as through holes having a circular shape in a front view, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted therein. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in a front view in which the long diameter direction is along the longitudinal direction of the first link member 541, and is slidable along the long hole shape (long diameter direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted.

Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated around the support hole 541a in the direction in which the sliding hole 541c is raised (arrow B1 direction, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 causes the insertion shaft 531c of the substrate member 510 to move. A direction in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved upward along the guide groove 511 and the first link member 541 lowers the sliding hole 541c around the support hole 541a (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36). When rotated to, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is arranged on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are arranged. Since they are connected (connected) to each other through the connection groove 513 of the substrate member 510, the drive force transmission path formed by the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (that is, the rotation shaft 524a of the crank gear 524 is connected. The length dimension of the portion connecting the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525) and the portion connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the portion from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the drive force of the drive motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the drive force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (the shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510, so that the support thereof is supported. To increase the rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole by utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the drive unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the substrate member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed. You can As a result, when the driving force of the drive motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are prevented from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, since the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 (the shaft supporting hole 541a) of the first link member 541 are rotatably supported by the substrate member 510, the connecting rod 525 is mounted on the substrate member 510. As compared with the case of rotatably rotatably supporting the substrate member 510, the transmission path of the driving force from the position rotatably supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened. Transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the urging spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to transmit the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530, and is a long plate. Formed into a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 has a shaft support hole 542a and a sliding hole 542c formed in the base end portion and the tip end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted in the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 is inserted in the slide hole 542c. In addition, a locking claw 542b is formed at an intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connecting groove 514 and locks the arm portion of the biasing spring 571.

Therefore, since the second link member 542 holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically with the first link member 541, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. In addition, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 via the second link member 542 in the ascending direction (the direction in which the tip end side of the second link member 542 (sliding hole 542c) is raised). Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is raised, the driving force of the drive unit 520 can be assisted. This can prevent the drive motor 522 from increasing in size.

In addition, a retaining ring E formed as an E ring is attached to the support shafts 527 and 516 inserted into the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542, respectively, as a retainer. The insertion shaft 531c inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface (having a larger diameter than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c and 542c as a retaining member ( A fastening screw having a head or washer is fastened (see FIG. 35).

Here, with respect to the first link member 541, the mounting of the retaining ring E as a retaining member or the fastening of the fastening screw with respect to the coupling shaft 526 inserted into the coupling hole 541b of the first link member 541 is omitted. That is, by locking the two of the three shafts (the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c) to the retaining shaft, the retaining of the remaining one (the connecting shaft 526) can be omitted. The number of parts required for retaining can be reduced. In particular, the two long shafts of the first link member 541, which are located on the base end side and the tip end side, are prevented from coming off, and the shafts at intermediate positions between the base end side and the tip end side are prevented from coming off. By adopting a structure in which the first link member 451 is omitted, it is possible to prevent the shaft (the connecting shaft 526) with the retaining member omitted from coming off from the connecting hole 541b, and to stably rotate the first link member 451.

As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides (moves up and down) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engaging member 539 to a predetermined position. Then, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.

FIG. 37A is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530, and FIG. 37B is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 in which the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 in which the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 is viewed from the rear. is there.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism unit 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, and The first pinion gear 537, the second pinion gear 538, and the first coupling member 539 are provided, and the first coupling member 539 is slid up and down by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit 520 via the first link member 541 ( Raise and lower).

According to the slide mechanism portion 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 to the A layer base. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via the two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby accelerating the slide displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. Is configured so that

The A-layer base plate 531 includes a main body portion 531a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, and a guide groove 531b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. , A plurality of insertion shafts 531c (a total of 6 in this embodiment) that are provided in a protruding manner from the rear surface of the main body portion 531a and are arranged side by side with the guide groove 531b interposed therebetween, and are provided in a front surface side of the main body portion 531a. And a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

The A-layer base plate 531 inserts a plurality of insertion shafts 531c into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and has a collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide grooves 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. By fastening and fixing as a retaining member, the substrate member 510 is held so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation) (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the support shaft 531d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

In this embodiment, the two insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, tighten the fastening screw to prevent it from coming off.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively located on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 39) than the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 39) of the A-layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is in a forward tilted posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward tilted posture is set to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first link member 541. It can be effectively regulated by the 2 link member 542, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

The B-layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in front view, a plurality of insertion holes 532b penetratingly formed in the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of protrusions provided from the rear surface of the main body portion 532a. And a rack portion 532d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears on the side surface of the body portion 532a along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 532a.

In the B-layer base plate 532, a plurality of insertion shafts 532c are respectively inserted into the guide grooves 531b of the A-layer base plate 531 and the fastening shafts 532c are fastened by fastening screws at the tips thereof. It is held by the A layer base plate 531 so as to be capable of sliding displacement (elevation).

In this case, the rack portion 532d arranged on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is meshed with the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, whereby a first set of double rack and pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the A layer base plate 531 is slid (displaced) with respect to the substrate member 510, the B layer base plate 532 is moved relative to the A layer base plate 531 via the first double rack and pinion structure. Slide displacement (elevation). That is, the B layer base plate 532 is slid with respect to the substrate member 510 (moved up and down) in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A layer base plate 531.

The B layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the B layer base plate 532, and slide-displaces (elevates) integrally with the B layer base plate 532. To be done. Specifically, the B layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a protruding from the back surface thereof, and the fastening shafts 533a are fastened with the fastening screws inserted in the insertion holes 532b of the B layer base plate 532. As a result, it is fixed to the front surface side of the B layer base plate 532.

The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are fixed to the B layer base plate 532 after being inserted into the guide groove 539b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide groove 534b of the C layer base plate 534. .. In this case, one insertion shaft 532a of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B layer decorative body 533 rotatably supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B layer decorative body 533 and the B layer base plate 532 are slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the A layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slidably displaced (elevated with respect to the A layer base plate 531). ) Will be done.

The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a formed in a rectangular plate shape that is vertically long in a front view, and a guide groove 534b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. The main body 534a includes a plurality of insertion holes 534c formed therethrough, and a rack 534d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears along the guide groove 534b on the front side of the main body 532a.

The C-layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is viewed by the player from the front side, is fixed to the C-layer base plate 534, and is slid together with the C-layer base plate 534 to slide (elevate). To be done. Specifically, the C layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a protruding from the back surface thereof, and the fastening screws inserted in the insertion holes 534c of the C layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shafts 535a. By doing so, it is fixed to the front surface side of the C layer base plate 534.

The first coupling member 539 is a member for forming a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and for abutting against the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupled state. Yes (see FIG. 32 ), a main body portion 539a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in a front view, and a guide groove 539b that is a groove-shaped opening linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a. The main body 534a includes a decorative portion 539c continuously provided below the main body 534a, and a rack portion 539d having a plurality of teeth formed as rack gears along the guide groove 539b on the back side of the main body 532a.

The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that descend and incline toward the center. That is, the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V shape in which the center thereof protrudes in the descending direction (downward in FIG. 38) when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position as described above (see FIG. 32).

Further, a lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is provided with a recess 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof. The convex portion 630a1 protruding from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is housed (concave-fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 at the coupling position. By this concave-convex fitting, relative displacement (front-back direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position.

The C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539 are configured such that the plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C layer base plate 534 and the first coupling member 539, respectively. Thus, the B-layer decorative body 533 and the B-layer base plate 532 are slidably held (moved up and down) respectively.

In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B layer decorative body 533, the rack portion 534d arranged on the front side of the C layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a), and the first coupling member. 539 (main body portion 539a) and the rack portion 539d disposed on the back side are meshed with each other, whereby a second set of double rack and pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533) is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is moved through the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. 539 is slid with respect to the B layer base plate 532 (and the B layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid (moved up and down) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state in which the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

It returns to FIG. 33 to FIG. 35 and demonstrates. As described above, in the first coupling member 500, the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and the plurality of (the present embodiment) that are projected from the rear face of the slide mechanism unit 530 (A layer base plate 531) are provided. 6 insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, and a collar C is attached to some (4) insertion shafts 531c of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. The remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 while being mounted as a retaining member (see FIG. 35).

Here, also in the conventional game machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shafts 531c) are provided in the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are made to correspond to the substrate member (corresponding to the substrate member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511) and the moving member is slid and displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the driving means (corresponding to the driving unit 520).

In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts that are inserted into the guide grooves. On the other hand, if the number of the insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to the collar C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing the removal of the insertion shafts from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the slide displacement of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is provided on the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The first link member 541 is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 510 on the opposite side to the insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, one collar C of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide groove 511 can also be used as the first link member 541. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is ensured, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized, and the component (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c. The number of points can be reduced and the cost can be reduced.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510, which is the side opposite to the front side on which the slide mechanism section 530 is disposed. Since the second link members 542 are arranged symmetrically with respect to each other and are connected to one insertion shaft 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, the first link member Not only can an effect (stabilization of slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530) by making the supporting reaction force that the slide mechanism portion 530 receives from the 541 and the second link member 542 symmetric be achieved, but also among the plurality of collars C Since the color C of No. 1 can also be used by the second link member 542, the number of insertion shafts 531c can be secured and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized. At the same time, it is possible to further reduce the cost by reducing the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510, it is possible to stabilize the slide displacement and reduce the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with the crank mechanism (the crank gear 524, the connecting rod 525, and the connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510, so that the connecting groove 513 is interposed. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the drive unit 520 can be disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the constituent elements of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively utilized and the constituent elements can be efficiently arranged. As a result, the size of the first combined operation unit 500 can be reduced.

Particularly, in the first combination operation unit 500, the decorative portion 560 is disposed on the front surface side of the slide mechanism portion 530, so that the slide mechanism portion 530 and the decorative portion 560 are in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 33B). And the dimension in the front-back direction increases accordingly. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, since the driving unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the driving unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510. It can be disposed in a dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism portion 530. That is, it is possible to arrange the two elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 and the driving portion 520, which have relatively large dimensions, side by side in the left-right direction. Thereby, the dead space of the limited space can be effectively utilized, and the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is formed on the rear surface side of the substrate member 510 with the support shaft 527 as the center. Since the structure is rotated, the space for moving the first link member 541 can be made flat. That is, a space for moving the first link member 541 can be secured in a planar space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure a large space in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the size of the first coupling operation unit 500, particularly in the front-rear direction.

The same applies to the second link member 542. By utilizing the connecting groove 514, the biasing spring 571 is disposed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the dead space described above is effectively utilized, and The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be made planar, and as a result, the first coupling operation unit 500 can be downsized particularly in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 will be referred to as appropriate.

40A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combined operation unit 500 in the state where it was made. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B shows the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combined operation unit 500 in the state where it was made. 40 and 41, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, in the drive unit 520, the crank gear 524 is rotated in the direction of the arrow A1 so that the connecting rod 525 is interposed. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c, 542c about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upward in FIG. 40B). Therefore, the A-layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. The open state (the retracted position is arranged) is formed.

In this case, as described above, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 acts on the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to be the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the posture rotated in the direction of raising the sliding hole 542c around the shaft support hole 542a). ) In the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or rocking a gaming machine) acts on the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 moves vertically. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be quickly converged by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

From the state shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), in the drive unit 520, when the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the arrow B2 direction via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the arrow A2 direction. (Refer to FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction in which the sliding holes 541c and 542c are lowered (downward in FIG. 40B). .. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism unit 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are moved in the direction in which the sliding holes 541c, 542c are lowered about the shaft support holes 541a, 542a. Further rotation, the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged at the lower end side (lower side of FIG. 41(b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and thus the first coupling member. A state in which 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

41A and 41B, in the drive unit 520, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the arrow B1 direction via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the arrow A1 direction. By doing so (see FIG. 36 ), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move in the direction (upward in FIG. 41( b )) in which the sliding holes 541 c, 542 c are raised about the shaft support holes 541 a, 542 a. Is rotated. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism unit 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the first coupling member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

According to the present embodiment, since the slide mechanism portion 530 has a structure for slidingly displacing the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction via the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms, the sliding displacement of the first coupling member 539 is prevented. It can speed up. On the other hand, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position of FIG. 40(a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the slide mechanism portion 530 Since it is necessary to raise each of the components described above against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, centering around the shaft support hole 542a). The sliding hole 542c is actuated in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is rotated and held in a raised position. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41(a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40(a) against the action of gravity, the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as force, the drive force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity can be reduced.

Here, the board member 510 is arranged such that the extending direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 40 and 41). In detail, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected to the front side (front side, front side of FIG. 40A) of the substrate member 510 (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the rear side of the substrate member 510. It is arranged in a posture in which it is retracted to the rear side, to the back side of FIG. 40(a)). As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 disposed on the front side of the substrate member 510 has a forward tilted posture due to its own weight (a tilted posture so as to collapse in a direction away from the front face of the base member 510 (front side)). Since it can be suppressed, the load on the color C can be reduced correspondingly, and the durability thereof can be improved.

However, since the slide mechanism unit 530 is configured by stacking the respective elements thereof (for example, the A layer base plate 531, the B layer base plate 532, the C layer base plate 534, etc.), the substrate member 510 with respect to the vertical direction described above. If the inclination is made too large, the elements of the slide mechanism unit 530 are likely to come into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of the slide displacement increases. Therefore, the above-mentioned inclination cannot be made sufficiently large, and therefore a relatively large load is applied to the collar C.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 that are connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward tilted posture of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be regulated not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed, the durability thereof can be improved, and the slide mechanism unit 530 can be slid (moved up and down) in a stable state.

In particular, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are respectively located above the center of the A layer base plate 531 in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism unit 530 is in the forward leaning posture toward the front on the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. This can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid and displaced (elevated) in a stable state.

Next, the second combined operation unit 600 disposed below the first combined operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45.

FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. 43A is a front view of the second combined movement unit 600, and FIG. 43B is a rear view of the second combined operation unit 600. The front case body 612 is not shown in FIG. 43(a). 42 and 43 show a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second joint operation unit 600 includes a back case body 611 and a front case body 612, and a rear end of each of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 is rotatably supported. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 that is rotatably supported on the tip ends of the inner link member 621 and outer link member 622, and the inner link member 621. And a drive motor 640 that generates a drive force for displacing the outer link member 622, and a transmission means (a pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652) and mainly.

In the present embodiment, a pair of the link means, the second coupling member 630, the drive motor 640, and the transmission means is provided on each of the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612. .. In this case, the set provided on the left side and the set provided on the right side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are defined by the width direction of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (FIG. 43A left and right). (Direction) The configuration is substantially the same, except that it is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing through the center and the shape of the decorative portion is different.

The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are members made of a resin material and formed in a plate shape, and are fastened and fixed to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, and link means (interior space) are provided between the facing surfaces (internal space). The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are housed.

In the back case body 611, a pair of guide grooves 611a curved and formed in an arc shape are formed. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centered on a base end shaft 621a described later (that is, formed in a shape in which a part of an annular shape centered on the base end shaft 621a is cut off), and the inner link member 621 is formed. A collar 621d that is rotatably supported is internally fitted to the back surface of the. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the base end shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, so that the inner link member 621( It is possible to stabilize the rotation of the outer link member 622). As a result, the positional accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be improved.

The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 have their proximal ends rotatably supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 via the proximal shafts 621a and 622a, while the distal ends of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are distal shafts 621b, It is rotatably supported by the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

In this case, in the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, the distance between the proximal end shaft 621a and the proximal end shaft 622a and the distance between the distal end shaft 621b and the distal end shaft 622b are equal, and the proximal end shaft 621a. And a distance between the tip end shaft 621b and a distance between the base end shaft 622a and the tip end shaft 622b are equalized to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated about the proximal shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel (that is, shown in FIG. 43(a)). It is moved while maintaining the posture to do).

The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and that is coupled to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32), and the lower surface of the first coupling member 539. An upper surface 630a with which the 539e abuts and an opposing surface 630b with which the other second joining member 630 abuts each other when adjacent to each other are formed.

Note that the upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface that is inclined downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. To be done. Therefore, when the opposing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 are in contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 630 on the upper surface 630a side is a V-shape with the center recessed. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 44(b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decoration portion 539c) is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

Further, on the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, convex portions 630a1 each having a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view are provided so as to protrude on the facing surface 630b side. The convex portion 630a1 is housed (concave-fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 provided in the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this concave-convex fitting, relative displacement (front-back direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be restricted at the coupling position, as described above. Here, the convex portion 630a1 has a thickness dimension that becomes smaller toward the protruding tip. Therefore, when the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 is coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, it is easy to insert (internally fit) the convex portion 630a1 into the concave portion 539e1. it can.

A gear portion 621c is integrally formed on the base end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a fan-shaped portion that projects outward in the radial direction around the base shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear 621c.

The drive motor 640 is disposed on the back side of the back case body 611, and the pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 protruding to the front side of the back case body 611. The transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652 as described above.

Next, the operation of the second combined operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. In this description, FIG. 43(a) will be referred to as appropriate.

44(a) and 44(b) are front views of the second coupling operation unit 600, and the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. Note that, in FIG. 44(a), the state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged in the middle between the retracted position and the coupling position is shown in FIG. 44(b), the pair of second coupling members 630 is arranged in the coupling position. The respective states are shown.

In the retracted position shown in FIG. 43(a), the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are tilted in the directions in which they are separated from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated in the left and right directions. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted via the transmission gear 652 to the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated about the base shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are respectively rotated around the base end shaft 621a, and the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) come close to each other, as shown in FIG. It stands up in the direction.

When the left and right drive motors 640 are further driven to rotate from the state shown in FIG. 44A, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) come close to each other as shown in FIG. 44B. Further, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the opposing surfaces 630b are in contact with each other. On the other hand, when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 44B, the left and right link mechanisms (the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) are separated from each other. 43, the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position, as shown in FIG.

Returning to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the combined operation of the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a model view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a front view when the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position.

As described above, the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are coupled from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 31 to the pair of second coupling members. The members 630 are arranged close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the first combining member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second connecting members 630 arranged adjacent to each other on the left and right, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively.

Here, in the first combination operation unit 500 and the second combination operation unit 600, as shown in FIG. 45, the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first connection member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second connection member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said that Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (slide displaced) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. The vertical force F is a force component Fv (=F×cos θ) in the direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a, and a force component Fp (=F×sin θ) in the direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load that acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the center in the width direction.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the angle θ of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a with respect to the horizontal plane is set to be smaller than the angle α of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 with respect to the vertical direction. Further, in the present embodiment, when the action direction of the force component Fv is extended with the center in the width direction of the upper surface 630a as the starting point, the extension line is inside the base end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622 (the inner link member 621). Is formed so as to pass through the base end shaft 621a).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and the direction (vertical direction) substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other. Direction (FIG. 45 up and down direction), the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 come close to each other in the adjacent direction. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled, and a plurality of members ( It is possible to secure the effect produced by joining the first joining member 539 and the pair of second joining members 630).

That is, even in the conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are provided so as to be movable, and the pair of members are retracted to different retracted positions, respectively, and are moved from the different retracted positions to be arranged at the combined position. There is one that connects the members of (1) to each other (for example, see JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, at the joining position, when the joining is not performed properly, such as when a gap is formed between the pair of members, the effect produced by joining the pair of members is impaired. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the pair of members are symmetrically shaped, it is relatively easy to join the pair of members face to face, but three or more members are properly connected ( That is, it was difficult to bond them while suppressing the generation of gaps.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 in the coupling position, a pair of Since a force can be generated in the direction in which the second coupling members 630 are close to each other in the adjacent direction, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but also it is possible to bond these members to each other while suppressing the occurrence of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second connecting members 630. That is, the three or more members can be properly combined, and the effect of the combination can be secured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front view shape (FIG. 32 and FIG. 45) on the upper surface 630a side (FIG. 32 and FIG. 45 upper side). The shape shown in the drawing is a concave shape in which the center is recessed downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45 ), while the first coupling member 539 is a front view on the lower surface 539 e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45 ). The shape (the shape shown in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponds to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630, and has a protruding shape in which the center projects downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45 ).

Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is located at the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. When brought into contact with each other, due to the concave shape and the protruding shape, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630, and the first coupling member 539 causes the pair of second coupling members 630. The player recalls a mode in which the two are expanded in a direction in which they are separated from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the facing surfaces 630b).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at the coupling position, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, respectively. It is possible to form a force in a direction in which the 630 are brought close to each other and couple the pair of second coupling members 630 while suppressing a gap from being generated between the facing surfaces 630 b. As a result, it can be operated in a manner different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the operation can be enhanced.

Next, the annular motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57.

46 is a front perspective view of the ring operation unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a ring in the state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the coupling position. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 that can be raised and lowered and rotated via a link member 770, and as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). Below the device 81 (see FIG. 2)) and on the rear side of the rotary operation unit 300, the rear case 210 is disposed (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The circular ring operation unit 700 is moved up and down while rotating the pair of circular ring forming members 790, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupling position shown in FIG. 47.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are moved downward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the connecting position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are rotated upward in the direction in which they approach each other, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are combined so that the third symbol display device is connected. An annular shape is formed on the front side of 81 (see FIG. 10).

In this case, according to the circular ring operation unit 700, when the pair of circular ring forming members 790 is raised upward and disposed at the coupling position, the circular ring forming member 790 is mechanically moved to the coupling position (elevated position). Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for holding the pair of ring-forming members 790 at the coupling position can be suppressed.

48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 in which the exploded annular operation unit 700 is viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular operation unit 700 in which the exploded annular operation unit 700 is viewed from the rear. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the annular operation unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a rear case body 720 disposed on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and an opposite side of the rear case 720. The front case body 730 disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 disposed in the intermediate case 710 and generating a rotational drive force, and the rotational drive force of the drive motor 740 are transmitted. Gear group (first gear 751 to sixth gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) for converting rotational movement transmitted through the gear group into linear movement, and A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in the rack and pinion mechanism, an elevation base body 780 in which the tips of the pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported, and its elevation base. The body 780 is mainly provided with a pair of ring-forming members 790 whose base ends are rotatably supported.

The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism in a rotatable and slidable manner between the intermediate case body 710 and the rear case body 720 disposed on the rear side, and at the same time, the front case body disposed on the front side. 730 is a member that holds the base end of the link member 770 so as to be slidable between the link member 730 and the main body portion 711 formed in a flat plate shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and an insertion groove 712 formed with an opening in the main body portion 711. And a projecting part 713 projecting upward from the upper edge of the main body part 711.

The insertion grooves 712 respectively allow the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711) to pass through, and the insertion shafts 772 of the inserted pair of link members 770 are inserted. It is a groove-shaped opening that is inserted into each of the insertion holes 762c of the pair of racks 762 on the back side of the main body 711, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

The overhang portion 713 is a portion for coming into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 to suppress the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 56), and the center of the main body portion 711 in the longitudinal direction. Is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front and widens toward the upper edge of the main body 711 from the protruding end (widens), and its front surface 713a is the front surface 711a of the main body 711. They are formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected without any step and parallel to each other).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the protruding portion 713 abuts on the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). Further, when the link member 770 is in the upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 and the pillar portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). .. As a result, the link member 770 can contact the link member 770 in an upright state where the attitude of the link member 770 is particularly likely to be unstable, and in the vicinity thereof, so that the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

The edge portion of the overhang portion 713 is curved and formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the link member 770 is erected (that is, as the posture thereof tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can contact the back surface of the link member 770 can be increased, While the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed, the area where the overhanging portion 713 is visually recognized from the front can be made smaller, and the appearance can be prevented from being impaired.

Further, in the overhanging portion 713, a head portion 713b formed at the tip end in the overhanging direction (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49) is projected to the front (front), and this head portion 713b of the front case body 730 described later. It is connected to the top of the pillar portion 732. Therefore, as will be described later, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright, the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713 is provided between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between the rear case body 720 and the intermediate case body 710. An insertion groove 722 formed in the main body 721, a front end guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 752 to sixth gear 756). And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761.

The insertion groove 722 is formed by inserting the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, the insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and is linearly extended along the longitudinal direction of the main body 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position that overlaps with the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in a front view in the assembled state. The width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

The front-end guide groove 723 and the rear-end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for inserting the front-end guide piece 762a and the rear-end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762, respectively, and restricting the moving direction thereof. They are arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined space therebetween. The leading end guide groove 723 has a groove width set to be smaller than the trailing end guide groove 724, and the trailing end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 is formed in the leading end guide groove 723 such that the trailing end guide shaft 762b cannot be inserted therethrough. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress an assembling defect when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling work.

The front case body 730 is a member that holds the pair of link members 770 in a slidable manner between the front case body 730 and the intermediate case body 710, and includes a main body portion 731 formed in a flat plate shape of a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the main body portion 731. And a columnar column portion 732 that is disposed on the front surface of the column and that extends along the vertical direction.

The back surface 731a of the main body portion 731 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and as described later, the link member 770 is in a tilted state. When rotated (displaced) between the upright state, the back surface 731a of the main body portion 731, the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a of the overhang portion 713 are opposed to the front surface and the back surface of the link member 770. Abut. Thereby, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54 ). it can.

The pillar portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and for sandwiching the link member 770 between the guide member 733 and the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (the front left side in FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the raising and lowering of the raising and lowering base body 780, is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material, and is provided inside the column portion 732 in a posture in which its axis is along the vertical direction. Retained. As described above, the pillar portion 732 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the guide rod 733 is housed inside the pillar portion 732, so that the guide rod 733 is arranged using the dead space. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the ring operation unit 700 as a whole.

As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is changed to the vertical direction (the guide rod 733 Guide in the axial direction). In this case, since the guide rod 733 is arranged in front of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (on the front side) and behind the lifting base body 780 (main body 781) (on the rear side), it will be described later. It is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the elevation base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 on the front side and to secure the smooth elevation operation of the elevation base body 780.

The drive motor 740 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and has its drive shaft projected to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the first gear 751 has a second gear 752 to a sixth gear 756 axially supported by a plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720. Are sequentially meshed with each other, and the sixth gear 756 is meshed with a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported by a shaft 725 of the rear case body 720.

As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism is composed of the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported by the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pair of pinion gears 761 are sandwiched therebetween. Racks 762 are arranged so as to face each other with their tooth surfaces facing each other.

The rack 762 has a front end guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b protruding from one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction thereof, and an insertion hole 762c penetratingly formed on the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. .. The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped projection, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the front end guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the front end guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, so that the slide displacement (linear movement) of the rack 762 is prevented. The direction is restricted to the extending direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

The pair of link members 770 are members for forming a link mechanism that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790, and the longitudinal direction. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762 and the other side in the longitudinal direction (tip) is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

50(a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50(b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50(c) is a portion Lc of FIG. 50(a). FIG. 50D is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50D is a side view of the link member 770 as viewed in the direction of the arrow Ld in FIG.

The link member 770 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 771, an insertion shaft 772 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 771 at one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body portion 771, and the insertion shaft 772. A projecting wall portion 773 projecting from the front surface of the body portion 771 on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 771 on the opposite side, and a gear portion arranged at the projecting tip of the projecting wall portion 773. 774 and.

As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft member having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 to the front (front) side of the body portion 771, and is protruded from the front surface of the body portion 771 at a protruding height h. The gear part 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed through the center thereof and a plurality of teeth 774b formed on the outer periphery of the shaft support hole 774 as a center. 782 is inserted (axially supported) and meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring-forming member 790 via the teeth 774b.

In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth lines are parallel to the axial direction, and the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 extend over the entire wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774. Then engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is relatively displaced with respect to the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 which is the object of meshing due to the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIG. 48 and FIG. 49)), the tooth 774b that is extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the annular ring forming member 790. It is possible to prevent the engagement between the portion 774 and the gear portion 792 from coming off. In addition, even when the relative displacement due to the bending or the twist described above occurs, and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 774 are engraved. Since the meshing area between the gear portion 774 (teeth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) can be secured by the amount of 774b, uneven wear of these teeth 774b, 772b is suppressed, and its durability is improved. Can be planned.

Here, for example, if the body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outward in the radial direction) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to secure the area of the bearing surface at the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in this embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured to the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. The seating area is reduced.

In this case, in the protruding wall portion 773, a wall surface (a wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft supporting hole 774a) opposite to a wall surface on which the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 are formed by being extended and carved is Since it is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis, even if the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the shaft of the gear portion 774 is The seating surface area can be secured at the end face in the direction, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) arranged at the end face in the axial direction of the gear portion 774 can be correspondingly increased. Further, when the link member 770 (the main body 771, the protruding wall portion 773, and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from a resin material, the protruding wall portion 773 is provided on the side opposite to the wall surface on which the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, not only the protruding wall portion 773 but also the entire wall thickness including the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 can be made uniform, and the moldability thereof can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the teeth 774b are engraved on the entire surface of the protruding wall 773 (that is, up to the connecting portion with the front surface of the main body 771), the area where the teeth 774b are formed is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the meshing with the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the ring-forming member 790 from being disengaged. Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (the main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773, and the gear portion 774) is integrally formed from a resin material, the teeth 774b extend only partway through the protruding wall portion 773. In the case where it is not performed, the wall thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the entire surface, and the formability thereof can be further improved.

As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 is protruded from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. Since it is provided, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the protrusion height h of the protruding wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the disposition position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (front) by the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The effect of this offset will be described later.

It returns to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, and demonstrates. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is vertically moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770, and the main body portion 780 and the rear surface of the main body portion 780. And a pair of shafts 782 that project from the shaft and pivotally support the gear part 774 (the shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and the gear part 792 (the shaft support) of the ring-forming member 790 that is arranged in parallel below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the hole 792a), and a pair of shafts 783 that are disposed below the pair of shafts 783 on the back surface of the main body portion 781 and that are vertically guided by the pillar portions 732 (guide rods 733) of the front case body 730. The guided portion 784 and a cover body 785 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 781 are mainly provided.

A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted through the insertion holes so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is restricted only to the direction along.

The cover body 785 is a member that is disposed so as to face the axial end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front. A portion 785a and an extending portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head in a strip shape and having a width smaller than that of the head 785a are provided, and these are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. .. As will be described later, when a relative displacement occurs in the gear parts 774, 792, the cover body 785 (the head part 785a and the extension part 785b) should be in contact with the axial end faces of the gear parts 774, 792. Thus, the relative displacement can be suppressed to properly maintain the meshing state between the gear portions 774 and the meshing state between the gears 774.

The gear part 774 of the link member 770 and the gear part 792 of the ring-forming member 790 are inserted through the shafts 782 and 783 respectively through the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the respective gear parts 774 and 792. The collar C having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support holes 774a and 792a is provided at the tip of the shafts 782 and 783, and a fastening screw is fastened and fixed, so that the shafts 782 and 783 are held rotatably supported. It

The pair of circular ring forming members 790 are members that are rotationally driven by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted through the link member 770 and that form a circular ring shape at the coupling position. A main body 791 formed in a shape divided into two parts and a gear 792 arranged on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body 791 are mainly provided. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is axially supported by the elevating base body 780 and meshes with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. The gear portion 792 has a shaft supporting hole 792a formed through the center and a center of the shaft supporting hole 792a. And a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery thereof.

A magnet (not shown) is embedded on the other side (tip) in the circumferential direction of the main body 791 on the side opposite to the side on which the gear 792 is arranged, forming a ring shape at the coupling position. When doing so (see FIG. 47 ), the tips of the ring-forming member 790 can be brought into close contact with each other using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, the annular shape can be reliably formed by the pair of annular forming members 790.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a connection state of the link member 770 with the elevating base body 780 and the ring-forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the annular motion unit 700. Note that FIG. 51 illustrates a state in which the elevating base body 780 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54 described later.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the tip ends (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported by the pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), respectively, and the pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 49), the base ends (gear portions 792) of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 are meshed with each other.

Therefore, as described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 drives the gear portion 774 (the shaft 782, see FIG. 49). The center is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the rotation is transmitted to the ring forming member 790 via the meshing of the gears 774, 792, so that the ring forming member 790 is rotated. (783, see FIG. 49) as a center with respect to the gear portion lifting base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 are erected or tilted with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730, so that the elevating base body 780 is moved up and down with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). To FIG. 57).

Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the tip of a link member 770 formed in the shape of a long plate, and ascends and descends with respect to each case body 710, 720, 730 via the link member 770, the elevating operation is performed. At times, the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771) tends to cause vibration or sway of the elevating base body 780 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 51). Also, the ring-forming member 790 is itself formed in a long plate shape, and the tip end opposite to the base end connected to the elevating base body 780 is a free end. It is easy to generate vibration or shaking with respect to the lifting base body 780. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the magnet is embedded in the tip of the ring-forming member 790, the weight of the tip becomes heavier, and the ring-forming member 790 is more likely to vibrate or shake.

Such longitudinal vibration or shaking of the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, a relative displacement is caused between the gear portion 774 integrally formed with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or shaking of the ring-forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes relative displacement between the gear portion 792 integrally formed with the ring-forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. .. Therefore, the meshing state of the gear parts 774, 792 becomes unstable, and the rotation operation of the annular ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 are not properly performed due to poor transmission of the driving force, and the gear part 774 is not performed properly. , 792 is accelerated and the durability is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cover body 785 is provided on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is provided on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. It is placed facing the. As a result, vibration or shaking occurs in the elevating base body 780 or the ring-forming member 790 due to the bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771), and even if an attempt is made to generate relative displacement between the gear parts 774, 790. , The cover body 785 (the head portion 785a and the extending portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end surfaces of the gear portions 774 and 790, thereby suppressing the relative displacement between the gear portions 774 and 792, and engaging the teeth. The state can be maintained properly. As a result, the transmission failure of the driving force can be suppressed, the rotating operation of the annular ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 can be properly performed, and the wear of the gear parts 774, 792 can be suppressed, The durability can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head portion 785a of the cover body 785 is arranged above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 is arranged in the link member 770. It is arranged between the gear parts 774 and between the gear parts 792 of the annular ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the axial end faces of the gear parts 774 and 792, the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) are sandwiched between the body part 771 of the link member 770 and the opposite side of the body part 791 of the annular ring forming member 790. The head portion 785a and the extended portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the axial end surface of the gear body 774 and the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively restricted.

For example, when the link member 770 is in the upright state or in a state close to the upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the main body 771 of the link member 770. Since the head portion 785a of the cover member 785 is arranged on the opposite side, the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 can be more effectively performed by the head portion 785a of the cover body 785. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in the tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or is in a state close to the tilted state, the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is attached to the main body 771 of the link member 770. ), the extending portion 785b of the cover member 785 is disposed on the opposite side, so that the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 is prevented from occurring. It can be regulated effectively by 785b.

On the other hand, regarding the ring-forming member 790, regardless of its rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in the upright state or the tilted state), the left and right of the gear portion 792 (left and right in FIG. 51). Since the body portion 791 of the ring-forming member 790 is disposed in the ring-forming member 790, the extending portion of the cover member 785 is provided on the opposite side of the body portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 with the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. By disposing 785b, the displacement of the gear part 792 due to the bending and twisting of the main body part 791 of the ring-forming member 790 can be effectively restricted by the extending part 785b of the cover body 785.

In addition, in the present embodiment, each gear portion 774 of the pair of link members 770 is not only meshed with the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 located below the gear portion 774, but also the gear portions 774 that are adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. Is also meshed. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 is not only meshed with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 located above it, but also the gear portions 792 adjacent to each other on the left and right are meshed with each other. To be done.

As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of ring-forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of annular ring forming members 790 (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the phase shift amount of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 (for example, the amount of backlash or dimensional tolerance) is paired with the rack 762. , The phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of rattling of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and the ring forming member with respect to the link member 770. The phase shift amount of 790 (for example, the amount of rattling of the shafts 782 and 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a and 792a, or the amount of rattling of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) is different between the pair of ring forming members 790. Due to the accumulation of the phase shifts, the phase shifts occur in the rotation operation of the pair of ring-forming members 790, and the synchronization accuracy deteriorates.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other, and the gear portions 792 of the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other, so that the above-mentioned phase shift is caused by the driving force. Even if it occurs in the transmission path of the above, the phase shift is not manifested in the rotation operation of the annular ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed in the most downstream of the transmission path of the driving force). As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotation operation of the ring forming member 790.

Next, the operation of the annular motion unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 are referred to as appropriate.

52 is a schematic rear view of the annular movement unit 700 schematically illustrating the annular movement unit 700 in which the pair of annular formation members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is a LIII- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in a LIII line. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the circular ring operation unit 700, schematically illustrating the circular ring operation unit 700 in which the pair of annular ring formation members 790 is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic sectional view of the annular motion unit 700 taken along the line LV-LV in FIG. 54. 56 is a schematic rear view of the annular movement unit 700 schematically illustrating the annular movement unit 700 in which the pair of annular formation members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 57 is the LVII- of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 700 in a LVII line.

52 to 57, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 510, the rear case body 520, and the front case body 530, the drive motor 740, and the gear group (first Illustration of the drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) or the cover body 785 is omitted. However, in FIGS. 52, 54, and 56, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 711 and the overhanging portion 713 (front surfaces 711a and 713a) of the intermediate case body 710, and the main body portion 731 (back surface 731a) of the front case body 730. The position of the upper edge in () is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the state in which the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the tip side thereof (tip guide piece 762a). The tooth surface of (side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end sides (insertion shafts 772) are pivotally supported by the rear end sides (insertion holes 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in a tilted state, and the pair of link members 770 are The elevating base body 780 having the tip side (gear portion 774) axially supported is arranged at the lowermost position. In addition, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are expanded (distributed to the left and right) in the directions away from each other.

When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (the state where the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at the retracted position), and the rotational driving force thereof is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). 52), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52, and as the pinion gear 761 rotates, the pair of racks 762 shortens the expanded length thereof (the rear end side insertion holes 762c are close to each other). It is moved linearly in the direction of letting. As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually erected by displacing the base end sides (insertion shafts 772) toward the center (that is, toward the directions close to each other).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is transmitted through the gear portions 774 and 792 to the pair of annular ring forming members. When transmitted to 790, the pair of ring-shaped forming members 790 is relatively rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780, and the tips of the pair of ring-shaped members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the upright movement of the pair of link members 770 forms a relative displacement of the lifting base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and rack 762), and the lifting base 790 is raised.

As described above, in the ring operation unit 700, the elevating base body 780 is pivotally supported by the tips of the pair of link members 770 whose base ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, so that the pair of link members 770 is erected or tilted. While allowing the elevating base body 780 to be raised and lowered by further, by engaging the gear part 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 whose base end is axially supported by the elevating base body 780 with the gear part 774 of the link member 770, The ring member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

That is, means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the elevating base body 790 (elevating means) and means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the ring-forming member 790 (rotating means) are individually provided. Since it is not necessary to provide the same in the link member 770, the link member 770 can also be used as the link member 770. Further, the rotational movement of the annular ring forming member 790 and the linear movement in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the annular ring is not formed at a fixed position but the position is changed in the vertical direction. Since the rings are formed in order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790 are engaged with each other, and the link member 770 is engaged through the engagement of these gears 774 and 792. Is transmitted to the ring-forming member 790. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, when the pair of link members 770 is erected, the position of the center of gravity becomes higher. Due to the bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771), vibration and shaking of the elevating base body 780 (and a pair of ring-forming members 790) in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 54, horizontal direction in FIG. 55) occur. It becomes easier (the amount of displacement in the front-back direction increases).

The bending and twisting of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) or the annular ring forming member 790 (main body portion 791) or the vibration and shaking in the front-rear direction are integrally formed on the link member 770 and the annular ring forming member 790. By affecting the gear parts 774 and 792 and relatively displacing the gear parts 774 and 792, the gear parts 774 and 792 may be out of mesh. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the gear portions 774 and 792, the meshing state (meshing area) becomes unstable, and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface. , 792b may be unevenly worn, resulting in a decrease in durability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 has the teeth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 that connects the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ), even if the relative displacement of the gear parts 774, 792 described above occurs, the meshing of the gear parts 774, 792 can be easily maintained by the extension of the teeth 774b. As a result, not only can the disengagement be suppressed, but also the meshed state can be stabilized, uneven wear of the teeth 774b, 792b can be suppressed, and the durability thereof can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761). When the rack is arranged at an intermediate position of the relative movable range) and the standing angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth 774b of the gear 774 and the teeth engraved on the protruding wall 773 are formed. The tooth 774b connected to 774b (see FIG. 50) starts meshing with the tooth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the annular ring forming member 790.

Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55 to the state shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 to be described later (that is, the rising angle of the link member 770 becomes large, so that vibration of the elevating base body 790 in the front-back direction and In a range in which shaking easily occurs and the meshing of the gears 774 and 792 is most likely to be disengaged, the tooth 774b extended and carved on the wall surface of the protruding wall portion 773 can be effectively used. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

From the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pinion gear 761 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 52 by the driving of the drive motor 740, and the pair of racks 762 are further shortened in the expanded length (rear end). When linearly moved in the direction in which the side insertion holes 762c are brought close to each other), the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 of the elevating base body 780 (see FIG. 49) and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position, and the tips of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other, so that the ring shape is changed. It is formed.

In this case, when the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position (that is, when the pair of link members 770 is erected to the upright state (the posture along the vertical direction)), the pair of link members is formed. Between the facing surfaces of 770, the connecting portion between the pillar portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the protruding portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 (in the present embodiment, the head portion 713b of the protruding portion 713, see FIGS. 48 and 49). Are provided, and the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (the head portion 713b of the overhang portion 713) are brought into contact with the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56 ), so that a pair of annular shapes is formed. The postures of the circular ring forming member 790 and the lifting base body 780 supporting the pair of circular ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 is erected upright, and the center of gravity is increased, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (left and right in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. In addition, the rack 762 is easily moved in the direction of the linear movement (the horizontal direction in FIG. 56) by the left and right rotations of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 arranged at the tip of the link member 770 are also unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the connecting portion (overhang portion) between the front case body 730 (column portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (overhang portion 713) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. Since the head portion 713b) of 713 is provided, the connecting portion (head portion 713b) causes the pair of link members 770 to rotate about the insertion shaft 772 in the left-right direction and the rack 762 to move linearly. Can regulate the movement of. Accordingly, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in the upright state, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

In addition, since the pair of link members 770 are disposed so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction (the left-right direction of FIGS. 52, 54, and 56), the link members 770 are tilted relatively downward (for example, from FIG. 52 to FIG. (Up to 55), the pair of link members 770 face each other while the pair of link members 770 try to rotate to the left and right (the left and right direction in FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. 770 can cancel each other and maintain their posture.

On the other hand, since the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to displacement in the front-back direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the facing surfaces of the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) is attached to the front surface and the rear surface on the base end side of the link member 770. The back surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the standing state while effectively suppressing the swinging of the link member 770 in the front-back direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 54 ). You can As a result, the elevation base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be raised and lowered while stabilizing their postures.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, a bulging portion 713 is formed to bulge upward in the widthwise central portion of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the bulging portion 713 is As shown in FIG. 56, as the widthwise central portion is approached (that is, as the link member 770 is erected), the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is made higher (that is, abutted on the back surface of the link member 770). The possible area is increased).

In this way, the position of the upper edge of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711) is raised not by raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a entirely, but by raising only the central portion. As the link member 770 approaches the standing state, the appearance of the intermediate case body 710 is prevented from being impaired (or the area where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed is reduced), and the protruding portion 713 is formed. It is possible to increase the contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770 to enhance the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swinging in the front-rear direction). As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the standing state while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance. That is, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be stably held in a stopped state at the combined position, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 near the combined position can be maintained. Can be raised and lowered while stabilizing.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the projecting portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowest position). The shape is set so that it can come into contact with the back surface of the 770 (see FIG. 46). Thus, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are stably held in a stopped state at the coupling position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are provided near the coupling position. For the purpose of elevating and lowering while stabilizing the posture of the elevating base, the elevating base 780 and the elevating base 780 arranged at the retracted position (lowermost) are used by utilizing the portion (overhanging portion 713) in which the height position of the upper edge thereof is increased. The effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring-forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained at the same time.

When the drive motor 740 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the above case from the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56, and the pinion gear 761 is rotated. Along with the rotation, the pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in the direction in which the rear end side insertion holes 762c are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually tilted, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53.

Here, in the ring operation member 700, the weight of the lifting base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 acts on the rack and pinion mechanism (the pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. To be done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 act on the pair of racks 762 through the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 may be lowered from the combined position. In this case, the descent of the elevating base body 780 is regulated by opposing the driving force of the drive motor 740 against the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 (that is, the elevating base body 780 is coupled. The structure (holding in position) increases the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the protruding wall portion 773 is provided between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the protruding height of the protruding wall portion 773 is increased. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50D). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surfaces of FIGS. 54 and 56). The thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 and the projecting height h of the projecting wall portion 773) is shown on the front side, the left side of FIGS. 55 and 57). The rack 762 is offset (separated) by an amount.

Accordingly, the weight of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 acts on the rack 762 via the link member 770 even in the offset direction described above. That is, as the force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770, the force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and the force component for moving the rack 762 in the moving direction can be generated accordingly. Can be made smaller. As a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, at the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 act on the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 is used as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of developing (i.e., the direction of tilting the link member 770 in the upright state). Accordingly, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of annular ring forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, the consumed energy required by the drive motor 740 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 56) is the insertion axis of the pair of link members 770. It is made smaller than the horizontal distance T2 between 772 (T1<T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture in which each of the link members 770 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, the posture in which the pair of link members 770 has a V shape). In this way, by setting the pair of link members 770 in the V-shaped posture, the drive motor 740 is moved to the above-described position in order to start the operation from the state (coupling position) shown in FIG. 56 to the retracted position. When rotationally driving in the opposite direction to the case, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) due to the rotational driving can be started easily and reliably.

In particular, in the present embodiment, a magnet is embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790, and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetically attached to each other. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. Therefore, it is possible to easily hold the elevating base body 780 and the pair of circular ring forming members 790 at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetic force of the magnet. In this case, it is necessary to keep the pair of link members 770 in a V-shape (that is, to set T1<T2) so as to maintain the coupled state at the coupled position and start the operation from the coupled position to the retracted position. This is particularly effective in terms of satisfying both ensuring of the release of the coupled state at the time.

Here, the magnet embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 56) and the distance T2 between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 in the horizontal direction are substantially the same. It is preferable to make them the same (T1=T2) or to make the former larger than the latter (T2<T1). Accordingly, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, it is possible to easily hold the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 at the coupling position.

In the present embodiment, the guide rod 733 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the rear side (right side in FIG. 57) of the elevating base body 780 (main body 781). To be done. Further, the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, through which the guide rod 733 is inserted, is arranged at the lowermost part of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of the forward offset of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780, and the pair of annular forming members. A guide rod 733 is arranged at a position between the center of gravity of the structure composed of 790 and the elevation base body 780 is guided to rise and fall through the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With such an arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effect of offsetting the elevating base body 780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring a smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

Next, the swing motion unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

The rocking motion unit 800 includes the two arm members 820 as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and is composed of two units for moving (displacement) the both arm members 820. That is, the rocking motion unit 800 is composed of two units which are arranged above and below the rear case 210 in the front view of the rear case 210, and are arranged on the left and right sides with the opening 211a interposed therebetween. In this case, since the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, respectively, in the following, one of these two units (on the left side of the opening 211a). The provided unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be described as a swing motion unit 800.

FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the swing motion unit 800 when the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swing motion unit when the arm member 820 is extended to the projecting position. 8 is a front perspective view of 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing motion unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 which applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 hangs vertically downward, and is retracted to the back side of the combined motion unit 400 to make it invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). At the projecting position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of lifting the tip end thereof upward and inclining it obliquely downward, and sticking out the tip end thereof to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

In this case, in this embodiment, when the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the projecting position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (weight of itself), and accordingly, the arm member 820 is moved to the extended position. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required to hold the drive motor 830. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking motion unit 800, which is a front view of the rocking motion unit 800 that has been disassembled. Further, FIG. 61A is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swing view of the portion LXIb of FIG. 61A. 7 is a partially enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. FIG. 61(a) and 61(b), the swing motion unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, in the swing motion unit 800, a mounting base 810 arranged in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7) and a proximal end of the mounting base 810 are rotatably supported. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 in which the drive motor 830 is disposed and in front of the mounting base 810. , Is mainly provided.

The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between it and the front case body 840, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. The mounting base 810 is provided with a shaft 811 that projects from the front surface thereof and that rotatably supports the arm member 820.

The arm member 820 has a body portion 821 formed in an elongated shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the body portion 821, and a body portion 821 opposite to the groove portion 822. A decorative portion 823 that is covered on the front surface of the tip end side of the same and is formed as a decorative body, and a shaft supporting hole 824 that is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821. Mainly prepared for.

The groove portion 822 includes a first groove 822a extending linearly and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and curved and extending in an arc shape. It is formed as a groove having an L shape in a front view from 822b. In other words, in the groove portion 822, the recessed portion formed in one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the protruding pin 833 is arranged at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63(b)). In, the shape is matched with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Further, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to have the same size as each other. The arm member 820 has its shaft support hole 824 inserted with the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810, so that the base end thereof is inserted. Is rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 on the front surface of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61(b)). reference). As a result, the arm member 820 is rotatably held between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 at the base end thereof.

The drive motor 830 has a plate-shaped drive arm 832 whose base end is fixed to the drive shaft 831 and which extends radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion provided at the tip of the drive arm 832. The mounting pin 833 is mainly provided, and the protruding pin 833 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 by a fastening screw in a state where the protruding pin 833 is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820.

As described above, the projecting pin 833 is a portion that is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and is the same as or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a cylindrical body having a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the protruding pin 833 is moved in the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822, and as a result, the arm member 820. Is rotated about the axis 811.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64, the swing motion of the swing motion unit 800 will be described. In this description, FIG. 61 will be referred to as appropriate.

62 to 64 are views for explaining the process of moving the arm member 820 of the swing motion unit 800 from the retracted position to the extended position in time series, and FIGS. 62(a), 63(a) and 63(a) and FIG. 64(a) is a rear view of the swing motion unit 800, and FIGS. 62(b), 63(b) and 64(b) are portions LXIIb and 63(a) of FIG. 62(a), respectively. 64] A portion LXIIIb of FIG. 64A and a portion LXIVb of FIG.

Note that, in FIG. 62, the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the extended position. In FIG. 63, the arm member 820 is in the extended position. FIG. 64 illustrates a state immediately after the arm member 820 reaches the extended position and a state where the drive motor is further rotationally driven.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), when the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a downwardly hung posture, and the protruding pin 833 is It is located at the starting point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a (the end opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, the right side in FIG. 61(b)).

In this retracted position, the protruding tip end surface of the protruding portion 821a protruding from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the restriction surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated about the shaft 811 due to an external force (for example, an external force generated by the player hitting or rocking the game machine), the protrusion 821a contacts the restriction surface 812. The rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated by bringing them into contact with each other, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) (the state in which the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is moved to the left in FIG. 61(b). When it is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise), the protruding pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61B). ..

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) around the shaft support hole 824 in FIG. 61(b). The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven, and the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62B. As a result, the protruding pin 833 is the end point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a. 63A and 63B, the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position.

Here, also in the conventional game machine, the first shaft (corresponding to the shaft 811), the moving member (corresponding to the arm member 820) rotated about the first shaft, and the driving force applied to the moving member. There is a drive motor (corresponding to the drive motor 830) for rotating the moving member around the first axis as the center of rotation by the driving force of the drive means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position (corresponding to the projecting position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the drive motor is opposed to the gravity (weight of the moving member) to restrict the movement (lowering) of the moving member (that is, the moving member is held at the raised position). Energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member is large.

On the other hand, according to the swing motion unit 400 of the present embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released by mechanically holding the arm member 820 in the extended position, and the arm member 820 is extended. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption required to hold the position.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B (the protruding pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position). Immediately after the above), the drive motor 830 is further rotated. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 62B, whereby the projecting pin 833 is inserted into the groove 822 as shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B. To be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a concave portion is provided on one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). In the state where the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position, the protruding pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on one inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). A state in which the projecting pin 833 is received in the recessed recess is formed, so that the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the projecting position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). Can be regulated to be rotated). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the extended position, and the amount of the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 in the extended position is consumed accordingly. Energy can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, with respect to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833, the projecting pin 833 and the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811) are connected. ) Is substantially orthogonal to each other, and the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the projecting pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. To be formed.

Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated about the shaft support hole 824 (the shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b moves in a direction that coincides with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Since the projecting pin 833 is pressed, even if the arm member 820 is rotated and the projecting pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

Therefore, even when the arm member 820 is rocked by the player hitting or rocking the game machine in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 is not supported by the shaft support hole. Rotation around the shaft 824 (the shaft 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the extended position.

In this case, as described above, in the arc shape of the second groove 822b, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b). In the state of being arranged at the connection position), it is matched with an arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the protruding pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (received) into the second groove 822b (that is, when the state shown in FIG. 63 is changed to the state shown in FIG. 64). In addition, since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b are matched, it is possible to prevent the posture of the arm member 820 arranged at the projecting position from changing. it can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the projecting position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the projecting position is prevented from changing (while maintaining the stopped state). The protruding pin 833 can be moved (received) into the second groove 822b, and the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the projecting position.

Here, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (the side separated from the shaft support hole 824) (of the first groove 822a). Even if the inner wall surfaces of the inner wall surfaces facing each other opposite to the shaft support hole 824 have a recessed portion), mechanical holding of the arm member 820 can be performed similarly to the case of the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when moving (accepting) the projecting pin 833 into the second groove 822b after the arm member 820 is arranged at the extended position. Occurs, the control becomes complicated, and the operation reliability decreases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824) (first Since the concave portion is formed in the inner wall surface on the shaft support hole 824 side of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other), the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. The arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the extended position by arranging the arm member 820 in the extended position and moving the concave pin 833 into the second groove 822b (accepting it). As a result, the control can be simplified and the reliability of the operation can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72, a ring operation unit 2700 in the second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, when the lifting base body 780 is lifted and lowered, the offset amount to the front side (front) of the lifting base body 780 is kept constant regardless of the lifting position. The elevation amount of the elevation base body 2780 in the embodiment is changed (increased or decreased) according to the elevation position. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720, and the front case body 2730 in the assembled state in the second embodiment, and FIG. 66 is the intermediate case body 2710, the back surface along the line LXVI-LXVI of FIG. 65. It is sectional drawing of the case body 720 and the front case body 2730. Note that in FIG. 65, the lengths of the case bodies 2710, 720, and 2730 in the longitudinal direction (the lateral direction in FIG. 65) are partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 65 and 66, only the main parts of the case bodies 2710, 720, and 2730 are illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the second embodiment, a space formed between the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the back surface 2731a of the front case body 2730 (the passage P that guides the link member 770 to be slidable). Is formed so as to project toward the front side (the front side, the upper side in FIG. 65) of both case bodies 2710 and 2730.

That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the space is formed linearly along the longitudinal direction of the case bodies 710 and 730, and the link member 770 is slidably displaced along the linear space, so that the space is moved up and down. The offset amount to the front side of the base body 780 is not changed and is maintained constant (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the space P is formed in a non-linear shape along the longitudinal direction of both case bodies 2710 and 2730, the link member 2770 is slid and displaced along the non-linear space. Thus, the link member 2770 is displaced toward the front side (upper side of FIG. 65) and the back side (lower side of FIG. 65) (see FIG. 67 ), and as the link member 2770 is displaced, the elevating base body 2780 is moved. Is also displaced toward the front side (the upper side in FIG. 65) and the rear side (the lower side in FIG. 65) when moving up and down. That is, the elevating base body 2780 is moved up and down while changing the offset amount to the front side (upper side in FIG. 65) (see FIGS. 70 and 72). The specific configuration will be described below.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the intermediate case body 2710 has a shape in which the front surface 2711a of the main body portion 2711 projects toward the front side (the upper side in FIG. 65) at the central portion in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 65). Corresponding to the shape of the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710, the front case body 2730 is formed in a shape in which the back surface 2731a of the main body portion 2731 is recessed toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 65). Accordingly, a passage P that guides the link member 770 in a slidable manner is formed between the front surface 2711a and the back surface 2731a.

The passage P is located on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 and extends linearly along the moving direction of the rack 762 (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the first passage P1. A first linear passage extending in parallel with the first passage P1 and offset toward the front side (front side, upper side in FIG. 65) of the first passage P1 and positioned at the longitudinal center of the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730. It is composed of three passages P3 and a second passage P2 connecting the third passage P3 and the first passage P1.

The facing interval between the passages P1 to P3 is set to be slightly larger than the plate thickness dimension of the link member 2770 (main body 771, see FIG. 67(a)), and the connecting portions of the passages P1 to P3 are arcuate. It is formed smoothly due to its shape. Therefore, when the link member 2770 is slid and displaced between the tilted state and the upright state, the inner wall surfaces of the passages P1 to P3 (the front surface 2711a) are different from the front surface and the back surface of the link member 2770 (main body 771). And the back surface 2731a) are brought into contact with each other, and the swing of the link member 2770 in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 65) is effectively suppressed, and the link member 2770 is smoothly displaced between the tilted state and the standing state. You can Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 2770 will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

67(a) is a side view of the link member 2770 and corresponds to FIG. 50(d). 67B is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720, and the front case body 2730 in an assembled state. A state in which the link member 2770 that is erected and laid down is disposed in the passage P is a schematic diagram. Illustrated schematically. Note that FIG. 67B illustrates a state in which the main body 771 of the link member 2770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and is cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), the link member 2770 in the second embodiment is similar to the link member 770 in the first embodiment in that the insertion shaft 2772 is inserted from the back surface at one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771. And a protruding wall portion 2773 is protruded from the front surface on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 771 opposite to the insertion shaft 2772, and the protruding wall portion 2773 is protruded. The gear portion 774 is arranged at the tip.

The link member 2770 according to the second embodiment is different from the link member 770 according to the first embodiment in that the protruding dimensions of the insertion shaft 2772 and the protruding wall portion 2773 are the same as the insertion shaft 772 and the protruding wall of the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that the dimension is set to be larger (longer) than the protruding dimension of the portion 773.

As described above, the insertion shaft 2772 is inserted through the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710 into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 so as to be slidable in the rotation direction and the axial direction, and the rear case body 720. The axial tip end surface is arranged on the back surface of the rear case body 720 through the insertion groove 722 of, and the collar C is fastened and fixed to the axial tip end surface of the insertion shaft 2772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). ..

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 from the main body 771 (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 67(a)) is a state in which the link member 2770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1. In the state where the tip of the insertion shaft 2772 is projected from the back surface of the back case body 720 and the link member 2770 is guided (held) in the third passage P3, the tip end surface in the axial direction of the insertion shaft 2772 is the back case. It is set so as to be substantially flush with the back surface of the body 720 (the collar C is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 720 or is arranged with a slight gap). Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides in the insertion hole 762c (see FIGS. 48 and 49) of the rack 762 in the axial direction (the vertical direction of FIG. 67(b)), The link member 2772 can be slid and displaced along each of the first passage P1, the second passage P2, and the third passage P3.

Description will be given by returning to FIGS. 65 and 66. As in the case of the first embodiment, the intermediate case body 2710 is formed with an overhanging portion 2713 that extends upward at the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 2711. The overhanging portion 2713 extends from the overhanging tip to the main body portion 2711. The front surface 2713a is formed in a generally triangular shape as viewed from the front and widens toward the end (widens), and the front surface 2713a is flush with the front surface 2711a of the main body portion 2711.

In the present embodiment, the area where the overhanging portion 2713 is formed (the area where the overhanging base portion is connected to the main body portion 2711) is substantially the same as the area corresponding to the third passage P3. The front surface 2713a of 2713 is formed as a flat surface that is flush with the front surface 2711a of the main body 2711.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the standing state when the link member 2770 is rotated (displaced) toward the standing state, the front surface 2713a of the overhanging portion 2713 abuts on the back surface of the link member 2770, and the link member 2770 is also formed. When the link member 2770 is set to the standing state, the link member 2770 is sandwiched between the front surface 2713a of the overhanging portion 2713 and the column portion 2732 of the case body 2730, so that the posture of the link member 2770 is likely to be particularly unstable. In and around that, the displacement of the link member 2770 can be regulated, and the swinging of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

Further, the edge portion of the overhanging portion 2713 is curved and formed in an arc shape in a front view (see FIG. 48). Therefore, as the link member 2770 is erected (that is, as the posture thereof tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 2713a of the overhanging portion 2713 that can abut the back surface of the link member 2770 can be increased, While it is possible to effectively suppress the swing of the link member 2770 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the area in which the overhanging portion 2713 is visually recognized from the front and prevent the appearance from being impaired.

The head portion 2713b of the projecting portion 2713 of the intermediate case body 2710 is connected to the top portion of the column portion 2732 of the front case body 2730. A guide rod 2733 is housed in the pillar portion 2732 of the front case body 2730. The guide rod 2733 is a member for guiding the raising and lowering of the raising and lowering base body 2780, and is formed of a metal material as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section.

Here, the guide rod 2733 in the second embodiment has a first portion M1 disposed on the bottom side (lower side in FIG. 66) of the pillar portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 in a posture with the axis centered in the vertical direction. And the first portion M1 with the shaft center vertically arranged on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 66) of the pillar portion 2732 of the front case body 2730 with the shaft center vertically arranged. The third part M3, which is arranged offset toward the front (front side, left side in FIG. 66), and the shaft center is inclined with respect to the vertical direction in order to connect the first part M1 and the third part M3. It is formed from the second portion M2 arranged in a posture.

Each portion M1 to M3 of the guide rod 2733 is a first portion M1 while the link member 2770 is being guided to the first passage P1, and a second portion while the link member 2770 is being guided to the second passage P2. While the link member 2770 is being guided to the third passage P3 by M2, it is formed at a position where the lifting base body 2780 can be guided (held) by the third portion M3. Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the elevating base body 2780 will be described.

FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the elevating base body 2780. As shown in FIG. 68, in the elevating base body 2780 of the second embodiment, similarly to the elevating base body 780 of the first embodiment, a guided portion 2784 is provided on the back surface of the main body 781. The lifting base body 2780 according to the second embodiment is the same as the lifting base body 780 according to the first embodiment except that the guided portion 2784 has a different structure.

The guided portion 2784 is formed of an annular guide portion 2784a and an opposed guide portion 2784b that is disposed below the annular guide portion 2784a (lower side in FIG. 68) with a predetermined distance from the annular guide portion 2784a. The annular guide portion 2784a is formed with an inner wall surface that is continuous over the entire circumference, and the space surrounded by the inner wall surface is an insertion hole for inserting the guide rod 2733. That is, the insertion hole is formed as a closed hole. On the other hand, the facing guide portion 2784b is formed of a pair of wall portions that are arranged to face each other with a space therebetween, and the facing surfaces of the pair of wall portions are insertion holes for inserting the guide rod 2733. That is, the insertion hole is formed as an open hole that has an open portion in a part in the circumferential direction and communicates the inside and the outside through the open portion.

As described above, in the first embodiment, four insertion holes are formed, whereas in the second embodiment, the number of insertion holes formed is two. Therefore, when the guide rod 2733 is formed in a shape having a bent portion (a connecting portion between the first portion M1 and the second portion M2 and a connecting portion between the second portion M2 and the third portion M3, see FIG. 66). However, it is possible to prevent the insertion hole from being locked in the bent portion of the guide rod 2733, and it is possible to smoothly move the elevating base body 2780 up and down along the guide rod 2733.

In particular, in the present embodiment, one of the two insertion holes (opposing guide portion 2784b) is formed as a hole having an open portion in a part in the circumferential direction, and the open portion is a front surface. The insertion hole (opposing guide portion 2784b) is located on the side facing the case body 2730, and is arranged on the lower side of the two insertion holes. Accordingly, when the guide rod 2733 has a shape in which the upper end side (third portion M3) of the guide rod 2733 is projected to the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 66) (see FIG. 66), the lifting base along the guide rod 2733 is used. The body 2780 can be smoothly moved up and down.

Specifically, when lowering the elevating base body 2780 at the coupling position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733), the guided portion 2784 (the annular guiding portion 2784a and When the opposing guide portion 2784b located below the opposing guide portion 2784b reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 first, the opposing guide portion 2784b has an open portion on the front case body 2730 side. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the facing guide portion 2784b from being locked to the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 by utilizing the open portion. As a result, the elevating base body 2780 can be smoothly lowered.

Similarly, when the elevating base body 2780 at the retracted position (the position where the guided portion 2784 is guided by the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733) is raised, the guided portion 2784 (the annular guiding portion 2784a and the opposing guide) is raised. The annular guide portion 2784a located above the portion 2784b) reaches the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733 first, and the annular guide portion 2784a is guided along the inclination direction of the second portion M2. When the elevating base body 2780 is displaced to the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 66) with, the facing guide portion 2784b is formed with an open portion on the front case body 2730 side. Thus, it is possible to prevent the facing guide portion 2784b from being locked by the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733. As a result, the elevating base body 2780 can be smoothly raised.

Note that the guide rod 2733 is, as in the case of the first embodiment, in front of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (front side, left side in FIG. 66) and behind the elevating base body 2780 (main body 781) ( Since it is arranged on the back side, the right side in FIG. 66), as will be described later, the effect of arranging the lift base body 2780 on the front side with respect to the rack 762 is exerted, and the smooth movement of the lift base body 2780 is performed. Can be achieved at the same time.

Next, the operation of the annular motion unit 2700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72. In this description, FIGS. 65 to 68 will be referred to as appropriate.

69 is a schematic rear view of the annular operation unit 2700 schematically illustrating the annular operation unit 2700 in which the pair of annular formation members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 70 is the LXX- of FIG. 69. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the annular motion unit 2700 in a LXX line. 71 is a schematic rear view of the annular motion unit 2700 schematically illustrating the annular motion unit 2700 in which the pair of annular shape forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 72 is the LXXI- of FIG. 71. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the ring operation unit 2700 in a LXXI line.

69 to 72, the outer shell structure including the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720, and the front case body 2730, the drive motor 740, and the gear group (first Illustration of the drive structure including the first gear 751 to the sixth gear 756) and the cover body 785 is omitted. However, in FIGS. 69 and 71, the positions of the upper edges of the main body portion 2711 and the projecting portion 2713 (front surfaces 2711a and 2713a) of the intermediate case body 2710, and the upper portion of the main body portion 2731 (back surface 2731a) of the front case body 2730. The position of the edge is schematically illustrated by using a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, in the state where the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the tip side thereof (tip guide piece 762a). The tooth surface of (side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the rotation driving force of the drive motor 540 causes the pinion gear 761 to rotate clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 69 via the gear group, whereby the rack 762 moves linearly. As the pair of link members 2770 is gradually raised, the elevating base body 2780 is raised.

In this case, the pair of link members 2770 are slid while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passage P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730 (see FIG. 65 ), and moved up and down. The base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is raised along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

When the rack 762 is linearly moved by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 540 and the pair of link members 2770 is raised and the lifting base body 2780 is further raised, the pair of link members 2770 is moved to the second path of the path P. At P2 (see FIG. 65), the guided portions 2784 of the elevating base body 2780 reach the second portion M2 of the guide rod 2733, respectively, and are guided along the second passage P2 and the second portion M2. The pair of link members 2770 and the elevating base body 2780 gradually change their longitudinal position (horizontal position in FIG. 70) to the front side (front, left side in FIG. 70) (that is, the offset amount to the front side gradually. Rising and rising).

When the pair of link members 2770 reach the third passage P3 of the passage P (see FIG. 65) and the guided portion 2784 of the elevating base body 2780 reaches the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, these links are formed. The front-rear position of the member 2770 and the elevating base 2780 (the position in the left-right direction in FIG. 70) is set to the most front position (that is, the amount of offset to the front side is maximum).

Thereafter, the pair of link members 2770 is further raised while being guided by the third passage P3 of the passage P (see FIG. 65), and the elevating base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is moved to the third portion of the guide rod 2733. By further raising along M3, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the pair of link members 2770 are erected substantially vertically, the pair of annular ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and A circular ring shape is formed by abutting the tips of the circular ring forming members 790.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the offset amount to the front side (front, left side of FIGS. 70 and 72) of the pair of link members 2770 and the elevating base body 2780 is configured to be changeable (increased or decreased). The offset amount to the side is set to be larger than the offset amount at least at the retracted position at the coupling position, so that the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) at the coupling position. It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 and the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for moving the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position.

That is, if the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is offset to the front side (front, left side in FIG. 72), the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming part) is generated by the amount of the force component in the offset direction. The weight of the member 790) can reduce the force component that tends to move the rack 762 in the moving direction. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for holding the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) at the coupling position can be suppressed accordingly. On the other hand, when the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is moved up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position, the force component in the above-mentioned offset direction becomes resistance to the contrary, and the elevating base body 2780 is correspondingly moved. The energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to move the (ring forming member 790) up and down increases.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the third passage P3 of the passage P is arranged at a position projecting to the front side with respect to the first passage P1, the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790). The amount of offset to the front side of the vehicle is suppressed to a small amount in the route (the region corresponding to the first passage P1 and the second passage P2) between the retracted position and the coupling position, while the coupling position (third passage P3 Can be increased to a large amount. Therefore, at the coupling position, a force component in the offset direction can be secured, and the rack 762 can be suppressed from being moved by the weight of the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790). On the other hand, when the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is moved up and down between the retracted position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance.

As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) at the coupling position is suppressed, and the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is coupled to the retracted position and retracted. It is possible to achieve both the suppression of energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to raise and lower between the positions.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73 and FIG. 74, the ring operation unit 3700 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which when the elevating base body 780 is moved up and down, the offset amount to the front side (front) of the elevating base body 780 is maintained constant regardless of the elevating position. In the embodiment, the amount of offset to the front side (front) of the elevating base body 2780 is changed (increased or decreased) according to the elevating position as in the case of the second embodiment, and further, at least in the connecting position. The main body 771 of the member 3770 is elastically deformed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the ring operation unit 3700 of the third embodiment is different from the ring operation unit 2700 of the second embodiment in the configuration of the link member 3700, which is different from the link member 2700 (see FIG. 67) of the second embodiment. Except for this point, the other configurations are the same. That is, in the third embodiment, the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720, and the front case body 2730 (all of which are shown in FIGS. 65 and 66) and the elevating base body 2780 (see FIG. 68) described in the second embodiment. Is used. The description of these same configurations will be omitted.

73(a) is a side view of the link member 3770 in the third embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 50(d). Further, FIG. 73B is a top view of the intermediate case body 2710, the rear case body 720, and the front case body 2730 in an assembled state, and shows a state in which the erected and collapsed link member 3770 is arranged in the passage P. Illustrated schematically. Note that FIG. 73B illustrates a state in which the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is cut along the opening edge of the passage P and is viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), the link member 3770 in the third embodiment is similar to the link member 770 in the first embodiment in that the insertion shaft 772 is inserted from the back surface at one longitudinal side (base end) of the main body 771. And a protruding wall portion 2773 is protruded from the front surface on the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 771 opposite to the insertion shaft 772, and the protruding wall portion 2773 is protruded. The gear portion 774 is arranged at the tip.

In the link member 3770 of the third embodiment, the protruding dimension of the protruding wall portion 3773 is larger than that of the protruding wall portion 773 of the first embodiment, compared to the link member 770 of the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same, except that they are set to larger (longer) dimensions. On the other hand, in the link member 3770 of the third embodiment, the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 772 is smaller (shorter) than the projecting dimension of the insertion shaft 2772 of the second embodiment, compared to the link member 2770 of the second embodiment. Other configurations are the same except that the dimensions are set. That is, the insertion shaft 772 is common in the first embodiment and the third embodiment, and the protruding wall portion 3773 is common in the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is inserted in the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the rotational direction via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 2710, and also through the insertion groove 722 of the rear case body 720. An axial tip surface is arranged on the back surface of the rear case body 720, and a collar C is fastened and fixed to the axial tip surface of the insertion shaft 772 (see FIGS. 48 and 49).

In this case, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 is slidable in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 (see FIG. 67(b)), but in the third embodiment, the first embodiment. As in the case of the configuration, the collar C is brought into contact with the rear surface of the rear case 520 to restrict (limit) the sliding of the insertion shaft 772 in the axial direction with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762. ..

That is, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the dimension of the insertion shaft 772 projecting from the main body 771 (the horizontal dimension in FIG. 73(a)) is such that the link member 3770 is guided (held) in the first passage P1. In this state, the distal end surface of the insertion shaft 772 in the axial direction is substantially flush with the back surface of the back case body 720 (that is, the back surface of the back case body 720 is in contact with the collar C or has a slight gap). Is placed).

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 slides in the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67(b)), so that the link member 2772 moves to the first passage P1. While the slide member is slidable along each of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (see FIG. 67(b)), the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 3770 of the third embodiment is of the rack 762. The main body 771 of the link member 3770 does not slide in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73(b)) with respect to the insertion hole 762c, so that the main body 771 of the link member 3770 does not slide in the second passage P2 and the third passage P3. The inner wall surface of the passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710) is abutted. As a result, the link member 3770 has its main body portion 771 pressed by the inner wall surfaces of the second and third passages P2 and P3, and is elastically deformed forward (front side (upper side in FIG. 73(b))) while The passage P2 and the third passage P3 are slid and displaced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the operation of the annular motion unit 3700 will be described. In this description, FIGS. 69 to 71 are referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 74 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the ring operation unit 3700 in which the pair of ring forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling position, and corresponds to FIG. 72. In FIG. 74, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, an outer shell structure including an intermediate case body 2710, a rear case body 720, and a front case body 2730, a drive motor 740, and a gear group (first gear 751). The drive structure including the sixth gear 756) or the cover body 785 is not shown.

As described above, in the state in which the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the pair of racks 762 are expanded in the directions in which they are separated from each other, and the rotation of the drive motor 540 is increased. The rack 762 is linearly moved by the driving force, so that the pair of link members 3770 is gradually raised, and the lifting base body 2780 is raised.

In this case, the pair of link members 3770 slides while being guided by the first passage P1 of the passages P formed between the intermediate case body 2710 and the front case body 2730, as in the case of the second embodiment. At the same time, the elevating base body 2780 (guided portion 2784) is raised along the first portion M1 of the guide rod 2733.

As shown in FIG. 74, the standing of the pair of link members 3770 and the raising of the elevating base body 2780 are further advanced, and the pair of link members 3770 are moved along the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 of the passage P ( 73(b)), when the guided portion 2784 of the elevating base body 2780 is guided by the second portion M2 and the third portion M3 of the guide rod 2733, the link member 3770 is erected substantially vertically. Then, the pair of ring-forming members 790 is arranged at the coupling position, and the ring shape is formed.

In this case, in the link member 3770, as described above, the main body 771 is brought into contact with the inner wall surfaces of the second passage P2 and the third passage P3 (the front face 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710), and the main body 771 is brought into contact with the main body 771. By pressing the portion 771 toward the front side (back surface 2731a side) of the front case 2730, the link member 3770 (main body portion 771) is elastically deformed (flexed).

As described above, in the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the positions of the first passage P1 and the third passage P3 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73(b)) are made different, The offset amount at the coupling position is increased to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) at the coupling position, and reduce the offset amount at the retracted position. Thus, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required for moving the lifting base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position.

In particular, in the third embodiment, the insertion shaft 772 protruding from one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the link member 3770 (main body 771) slides axially with respect to the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762. Is restricted (restricted), that is, one longitudinal side (base end) of the link member 3770 (main body 771) is displaced in the offset direction (front-back direction, vertical direction in FIG. 73B) with respect to the rack 762. Since it is connected to the rack 762 in an unusable state, when the link member 3770 is erected, as shown in FIG. 74, one of the opposing inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 (the front face 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710). ) Is elastically deformed, the main body 771 of the link member 3770 elastically deformed, and the elastically deformed main body 771 of the link member 3770 is connected to the other of the inner wall surfaces of the third passage P3 facing each other (of the front case body 2730). It is possible to form a pressed state on the back surface 2731a).

Accordingly, in the state where the elevating base body 2780 is arranged at the coupling position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction due to the elevating base body 2780 being offset, the link member 3770 (main body 771) is provided in the third passage P3. It is possible to suppress the rack 762 from moving in the horizontal direction due to the weight of the elevating base body 2780, the ring-forming member 790, and the like due to the increase in resistance caused by pressing against one of the facing inner wall surfaces. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) at the coupling position.

On the other hand, in the first passage P1 of the passage P, depending on the inner wall surfaces of the first passage P1 facing each other (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710 and the back surface 2731a of the front case body 2730), the main body portion 771 of the link member 3770 may be formed. The elastic deformation is not formed, and the state in which the opposing inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is pressed by the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is released. Thereby, the resistance between the link member 3770 (main body 771) and the inner wall surface of the first passage P1 is suppressed, and the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) is moved up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position. It is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 that is necessary for this.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, a first combination operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a crank mechanism (crank gear 524, rotating shaft 525a and connecting rod 525) and a first link member 541 (rotating mechanism) are used as a mechanism for converting the rotational movement of the drive motor 522 into the linear movement of the slide mechanism unit 530. ) Is used, the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544) is used as a mechanism for converting the rotational motion of the drive motor 522 into the linear motion of the slide mechanism unit 530 in the fourth embodiment. It The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 75 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 according to the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 75, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, the first coupling operation unit 4500 according to the fourth embodiment includes a drive unit 4520 that is disposed on the front side of the substrate member 4510 and that generates a drive force, and a drive force of the drive unit 4520. A rack and pinion mechanism (a pinion gear 4543 and a rack 4544) that is transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 and is disposed on the back side of the substrate member 4510 is configured.

Here, the first combination operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment transmits the rotational driving force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism section 530 with respect to the first combination operation unit 500 in the first embodiment. Only the configuration (that is, the first link member 541 is adopted in the first embodiment, whereas the rack and pinion mechanism is adopted in the fourth embodiment) is different, and the other structures are the same. Therefore, in the following, only the configuration for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will be omitted.

The substrate member 4510 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and a connecting hole 4513 is formed on the side (left side in FIG. 75) of the pair of guide grooves 511. The connection hole 4513 allows the connection shaft 4526 of the drive unit 4520 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the board member 4510 and connects the connection shaft 4526 and the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism on the back side of the board member 4510. Is a circular opening when viewed from the front.

The drive unit 4520 includes a drive motor 522, a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, a second gear 4524 meshed with the pinion gear 523, and rotatably supported by the case body 521. , And a connecting shaft 4526 protruding from the end surface of the second gear 4524. The connecting shaft 4526 is coaxially fixed to the second gear 4524. Therefore, when the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 is transmitted to the second gear 4524 through the pinion gear 523 and the second gear 4524 is rotated, the connecting shaft 4526 is rotated in synchronization with the second gear 4525.

As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530, and the pinion gear 4543 and the rack gear in which the pinion gear 4543 is meshed are linearly formed on the side surface. And a rack 4544 that is carved. The rack 4544 is coupled to the slide mechanism 530 by fastening and fixing the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism 530. In this coupled state, the rack 4544 extends the guide groove 511 in the extending direction of the rack gear. It is supposed to be in line with the direction.

When the drive unit 4520 (case body 521) is assembled on the front side of the substrate member 4510, the connecting shaft 4526 is inserted into the connecting hole 4513 of the substrate member 4510, and the tip of the connecting shaft 4526 is on the rear side of the substrate member 4510. Is projected to. A flat surface is formed by chamfering at the tip of the connecting shaft 4526, and the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is coupled to the connecting shaft 4526 in a relatively non-rotatable manner by engagement with the flat surface. A retaining ring E formed as an E ring is attached to the tip of the connecting shaft 4526 that is inserted (coupled) in the pinion gear 4543 to prevent it from coming off.

Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 4500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

FIG. 76(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 in a state in which the first coupling member 539 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 76(b) shows the first coupling member 539 arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combined operation unit 4500 in the state where it was made. 77(a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 4500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combined operation unit 4500 in the state where it was made. 76 and 77, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism has the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the board member 4510 (see FIG. 76(b) upper side). Therefore, the A-layer base plate 531 (see FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is arranged on the upper end side of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised (the retracted position is arranged. The state is formed.

In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the urging force of the urging spring 571 causes the posture of the second link member 542 to change to the posture shown in FIG. 76(b) (that is, centering around the shaft support hole 542a). As a result, the sliding hole 542c is actuated in a direction in which the sliding hole 542c is rotated in a rising direction). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 76(a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or rocking a gaming machine) acts on the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 moves vertically. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be quickly converged by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

From the state shown in FIG. 76( a) and FIG. 76( b ), the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the first direction in the drive unit 4520, so that the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 are used (FIG. 75), when the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 76(b)), the rack 4544 is lowered by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. As a result, the slide mechanism unit 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38). And FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, the rack 4544 of the rack and pinion mechanism is lowered, and the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 531c) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is guided by the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510. By being disposed on the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 77(b)) of the first coupling member 539, the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is disposed).

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIGS. 77A and 77B, in the drive unit 4520, the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the second rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the first direction, When the pinion gear 4543 of the rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 77(b)) via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 75), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 causes The rack 4544 is raised. As a result, the A layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism unit 530 is lifted along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 4510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms act (FIG. 38 and 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b), the first coupling member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the drive force transmission path for transmitting the drive force of the drive unit 4520 (drive motor 522) to the slide mechanism unit 530 is configured by the rack and pinion mechanism including the pinion gear 4543 and the rack 4544, and the drive is performed. The rotational driving force (rotational motion) of the portion 4520 (driving motor 522) can be converted into a linear movement and then transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530. As a result, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 522 can be efficiently transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530, and the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stabilized.

Further, in the present embodiment, two or more (three in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be connected to one rack 4544, and It is possible to increase the number of components (color C) necessary for holding 531c that can be shared by the rack 4544. That is, in the first embodiment, the number of the color C that can be shared by the first link member 541 is only one, and therefore two other color C are required (FIG. 35). In the fourth embodiment, the two colors C can be eliminated (three colors C can be shared by the rack 4544). As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is ensured, stable slide movement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is enabled, and the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is reduced. Therefore, the cost can be reduced.

As described above, two or more insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 that slides (moves up and down) are connected to the first link member 541 (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. To connect, in the first link member 541 configured to transmit the driving force of the drive unit 520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 by swinging (rotating), the connection portion (sliding hole 541c) with the insertion shaft 531c moves. This is impossible because the locus becomes an arc shape, and it becomes possible only by adopting the rack and pinion mechanism as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 as in the present embodiment. (In other words, by making the moving locus of the rack 4544 a straight line, the input direction of the driving force can be made to correspond to the slide displacement (elevation) direction of the slide mechanism unit 530). As described above, while ensuring the number of the insertion shafts 531c and enabling stable slide movement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530, the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is reduced. Therefore, the cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79, a first combination operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the structures of the different mechanisms (the rack and pinion mechanism and the link mechanism (second link member)) are connected to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c) has been described. The structure (rack and pinion mechanism) of the same mechanism is connected to the slide mechanism unit 530 (insertion shaft 531c) in the fifth embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combination operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. 78, illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

Here, the first combination operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment transmits the urging force of the urging spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism unit 530 with respect to the first combination operation unit 4500 in the fourth embodiment. Only the configuration (that is, the second link member 542 is adopted in the fourth embodiment, whereas the rack and pinion mechanism is adopted in the fifth embodiment) is different, and the other structures are the same. Therefore, in the following, only the configuration for transmitting the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530 will be described, and description of the same configuration as the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

Further, in the following description, for convenience of description, one of the pair of rack and pinion mechanisms that transmits the driving force of the drive unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 (the one on the left side in FIG. 78) is referred to as “drive side rack. The “pinion mechanism” and the one that transmits the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (the one on the right side in FIG. 78) are referred to as the “rack and pinion mechanism on the urging side”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 78, the substrate member 5510 is a member that is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is horizontally long in a front view, and has a pair of guide grooves 511 sandwiched between the connecting groove 5514 and the support groove 5514 and the supporting hole at a position opposite to the insertion hole 4513. A shaft 5516 is provided. The connecting groove 5514 allows a locking claw (not shown) protrudingly provided on the front side of the pinion gear 5543 to be inserted from the rear side to the front side of the substrate member 5510, and the biasing spring 571 is attached to the inserted locking claw. It is an opening for locking the end portion (see FIG. 34 ), and is curved and extends in an arc shape centered on the support shaft 5516. That is, the connecting groove 5514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows movement of the locking claw when the pinion gear 5543 is rotated about the support shaft 5516.

The support shaft 5516 is a shaft body for pivotally supporting the pinion gear 5543 and the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34), and is provided so as to project on the front side and the back side of the substrate member 5510, respectively. That is, the pinion gear 5543 is provided on the support shaft 5516 provided on the rear side of the substrate member 5510, and the biasing spring 571 is provided on the support shaft (not shown) provided on the front side of the substrate member 5510. Be supported. The support shaft 5516 is arranged at a position line-symmetrical to the communication hole 4513 with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a symmetry line.

As described above, the urging side rack and pinion mechanism is a member for transmitting the urging force of the urging spring 571 (see FIG. 34) to the slide mechanism portion 530, and the pinion gear 5543 and its pinion gear 5543 are toothed. The rack gear to be combined is composed of a rack 5544 which is linearly engraved on the side surface. The urging side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) has substantially the same configuration as the drive side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 4544).

That is, the pinion gear 5543 is the same as the pinion gear 4543 in other configurations that determine the characteristics of the gear such as the number of teeth and the pitch circle, except that a locking claw (not shown) is formed on the front side. .. Similarly, the rack 5544 is the same as the rack 4544 in other configurations that determine the characteristics of the rack gear such as the number of teeth and the tooth shape, except that the upper end side of the rack 5544 has an uneven shape in order to avoid interference with the substrate member 5510. To be done.

Therefore, the slide mechanism unit 530 is held symmetrically by the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism (that is, the support reaction force acts symmetrically, and the slide mechanism unit 530 moves to the left and right). Therefore, the sliding displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed. Further, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is raised, the driving force of the driving portion 4520 can be assisted by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571 (see FIG. 34), so that the size of the drive motor 522 is increased. Can be suppressed.

As described above, the biasing spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, and is arranged in a state where the pair of arms are elastically deformed in the direction in which they approach each other (see FIG. 34). The elastic recovery force urges the rack 5544 through the pinion gear 5543 in a direction to push it upward (upward in FIG. 78). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts in a direction to hold the urging side rack and pinion mechanism in the posture shown in FIG. 79.

Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 5500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

79A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 79B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 5500 in the state where it was made. 80A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 5500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 80B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 5500 in the state where it was made. 79 and 80, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), when the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, both of the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the urging-side rack and pinion mechanism are operated. Racks 4544 and 5544 are arranged on the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 79(b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

In this case, as in the case of the first embodiment, the urging force of the urging spring 571 holds the rack 5544 in the urging side rack and pinion mechanism in the position shown in FIG. The pinion gear 5543 is operated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 79(b). Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 79(a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated by a player hitting or rocking a gaming machine) acts on the first coupling member 539 that should be in a stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 moves vertically. Even when vibration is generated, the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction can be quickly converged by utilizing the biasing force of the biasing spring 571.

From the state shown in FIGS. 79(a) and 79(b), in the drive unit 4520, the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the first direction, so that the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 are passed (FIG. 78), when the pinion gear 4543 in the drive side rack and pinion mechanism is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 79(b)), the rotation of the pinion gear 4543 lowers the rack 4544. As a result, the slide mechanism unit 530 (A layer base plate 531) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 80A and FIG. 80B (the state where the first coupling member 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged)), the drive motor 522 is moved to the first state in the drive unit 4520. The pinion gear 4543 in the drive side rack and pinion mechanism is driven in the reverse direction via the second gear 4524 and the connecting shaft 4526 (see FIG. 78) by being rotationally driven in the second rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the direction. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 80(b), the rack 4544 is lifted by the rotation of the pinion gear 4543. As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

According to this embodiment, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is slid (displaced or raised), the rack 5544 in the urging side rack and pinion mechanism can be lowered while the pinion gear 55443 is driven to rotate. it can. In this case, as described above, the connecting shaft 4526 and the support shaft 5526 are arranged in line symmetric positions with respect to the imaginary straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a line of symmetry, and on the biasing side. The rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 5543 and rack 5544) and the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 4543 and rack 5544) have substantially the same configuration.

That is, in the configuration in which the slide mechanism unit 530 is supported by the structures (rack and pinion mechanism and link mechanism (second link member)) having different mechanisms as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the left and right support reaction forces are The unevenness makes the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the supporting reaction force received by the pair of racks 4544 and 5544 from the pinion gears 4543 and 5543 can be made uniform symmetrically, and as a result, the slide mechanism unit 530 can be held symmetrically. be able to. Therefore, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, all (six in the present embodiment) insertion shafts 531c of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be connected to the racks 4544 and 5544, and the insertion shafts 531c are All of the parts (color C) necessary for holding can be shared by the racks 4544 and 5544. That is, the color C can be eliminated in the fifth embodiment. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is ensured, stable slide movement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 is enabled, and the component (color C) for holding the insertion shafts 531c is omitted, resulting in cost reduction. It is possible to reduce.

In this way, omitting all of the components (color C) for holding the plurality of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 that slides (moves up and down) in this way is the same as in the above-described embodiments. This is not possible with the configuration that employs the link mechanism (the first link member 541 or the second link member 542), and as in the present embodiment, the driving side that transmits the driving force of the driving unit 4520 to the slide mechanism unit 530 and This is possible for the first time by adopting a rack and pinion mechanism for both the urging side that transmits the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530. While ensuring the number of shafts 531c and enabling stable sliding movement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530, a component (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c is not required, and cost can be reduced. it can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, a first combination operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the racks 4544 and 5544 in the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism are separately formed has been described, but the rack 6544 in the sixth embodiment is Side rack and pinion mechanism and the urging side rack and pinion mechanism are both used. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first combination operation unit 6500 according to the sixth embodiment. 81, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted.

Here, the first combined operation unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment is different from the first combined operation unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment in the configuration of the rack 6544 (that is, in the fifth embodiment, two parts of the racks 4544 and 5544 are provided. However, in the sixth embodiment, the rack 6544 is formed as an integral single component, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, in the following, only the configuration of the rack 6544 will be described, and the description of the same configuration as the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the rack 6544, the racks 4544 of the drive-side rack and pinion mechanism and the racks 5544 of the biasing-side rack and pinion mechanism in the fifth embodiment are connected and integrated together. Formed as a part. That is, the rack 6544 is formed as a flat plate body in which a rack gear with which the pinion gear 4543 is meshed is formed on one side surface and a rack gear with which the pinion gear 5543 is meshed is formed on the other side surface in a linear manner. It

Next, the operation of the first combined operation unit 6500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

82A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 82B shows the first coupling member 539 arranged at the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 6500 in the state where it was made. 83A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 6500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 83B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st combination operation unit 6500 in the state where it was made. 82 and 83, the illustration of the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 is omitted in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, according to the first coupling operation unit 6500, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 4520 is rotationally driven in the first direction, The pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 82B), the rack 6544 (slide mechanism portion 530) is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510, and the drive motor 522 of the drive portion 4520 is moved. The pinion gear 4543 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 83(b)) by being rotationally driven in the second rotation direction that is the opposite direction to the first direction, and the rack 5544 (that is, the slide mechanism unit). 530) is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510.

According to the present embodiment, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, since the rack 6544 is held symmetrically by the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543, the supporting reaction force received by the rack 6544 from the pair of pinion gears 4543 and 5543. Can be made symmetrical with respect to each other, and as a result, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed.

Here, as in the case of the fifth embodiment, a pair of racks 4544 and 5544 are independently formed, one rack 4544 is driven by one pinion gear 4543, and the other rack 5544 is displaced by the displacement of the other rack 5544. In a configuration in which the pair of racks 4544 and 5544 are driven by each other, relative displacement is likely to occur between the pair of racks 4544 and 5544, so that rotation of one of the pinion gears 4543 and rotation of the other of the pinion gears 5543 occurs and a slide displacement of the slide mechanism unit 530 Lifting and lowering) becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rack 6544 is formed as an integral part, no positional deviation occurs in the relative positions of the rack gears formed on both sides, so that the rotation of one pinion gear 4543 and the other The rotation of the pinion gear 5543 can be easily synchronized. As a result, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the two rows of insertion shafts 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 are connected by the rack 6544 between the two rows, so the rigidity of the slide mechanism portion 530 as a whole can be increased. At the same time, the postures of the two rows of insertion shafts 531c with respect to the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 5510 can be stabilized. As a result, the slide displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 can be stably performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a composite operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the connection groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is linearly extended has been described. However, the connection groove 7481c of the slide rack 7481 in the seventh embodiment is formed to be curved in an arc shape. It The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

84A to 84C are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment, and the relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 with respect to the back arm body 471. In order to explain the above, a state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. 84(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 84(b), and FIG. 84(c) is the opening/closing second gear 452 with respect to FIG. 84(b). The gear 452 corresponds to the state of being rotated clockwise (clockwise), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, the opening/closing second gear 7452 differs from the opening/closing second gear 452 in the first embodiment in the arrangement position of the connecting protrusion 452d. It is formed. In detail, the main body portion 7452a is formed such that the portion where the connecting protrusion 452d is disposed projects radially outward (downward in FIG. 84(b)) as compared with the case of the main body portion 452a in the first embodiment. As a result, the distance from the axis of the opening/closing second gear 7452 to the axis of the connecting protrusion 452d is changed from the axis of the opening/closing second gear 7452 to the axis of the connecting protrusion 452d in the first embodiment. The size is set larger than the distance.

In the slide rack member 7481, as the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing second gear 7452 is positioned outward in the radial direction, the formation position of the connecting groove 7481c is correspondingly increased by the guide protrusion 481d side (FIG. 84(b)). (Lower side) is approached. Further, the connection groove 7481c is curved and extends in an arc shape. Specifically, the connecting groove 7481c has a ring shape in which the shaft center is located on the side opposite to the shaft center of the opening/closing second gear 7452 (lower side in FIG. 84(b)) and on the extension line of the guide protrusion 481d. It is formed into a substantially C shape divided at a predetermined center angle (in the present embodiment, about 45 degrees). The groove width of the connecting groove 7481c is a groove width with which the connecting protrusion 452d of the second opening/closing gear 452 can slide.

As shown in FIG. 84( b ), according to the combined operation unit 7400 in the seventh embodiment, when the second opening/closing second gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the second opening/closing second gear 452 is not rotated. In the gear 7452, the connecting projection 7452d is pulled downward (downward in FIG. 84(b)) by the slide rack member 7481, and the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft in the direction of slide displacement (upward/downward in FIG. 84(b)). The distance between 427 is the distance L3. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between the connecting holes 482d is the distance W1. Note that the distance L3 is, as described above, the distance L1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26(b)) because the connecting protrusion 452d is located more radially outward than in the case of the first embodiment. (L1<L3).

When the opening/closing second gear 7452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 471 from the state shown in FIG. 84( b ), the connecting protrusion 7452 d becomes By sliding in the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7481, the movement of the connecting projection 7452d moves the slide rack member 7481 upward (upward in FIG. 84(a)) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace the slide.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84(a), when the opening/closing second gear 7452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 7481c and the second shaft 427 in the slide displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 84(a)). The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L3), and the slide rack member 7481 is slid and displaced upward by the difference between the distances L3 and L2.

In this case, the difference between the distances L3 and L2 is larger than the distance L1 as described above, and thus the difference between the distances L1 and L2 in the first embodiment (FIG. 26A and FIG. b)) ((L1-L2)<(L3-L2)). Therefore, with the upward sliding displacement of the slide rack member 7481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and an interval between the connection holes 482d is enlarged. The distance W3 can be made larger than the distance W2 in the first embodiment (W2<W3). The same applies to the case of FIG. 84(c) in which the opening/closing second gear 7452 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, the connecting groove 7481c of the slide rack member 7441 is formed in an arc shape having an axis center on the side opposite to the opening/closing second gear 7452 (that is, convex toward the opening/closing second gear 7452). Therefore, the slide displacement amount (L3-L2) of the slide rack member 7481 associated with the rotation of the second opening/closing second gear 7452 is increased without increasing the size of the combined operation unit 7400. Accordingly, the maximum movement amount of the first pinion leg member 482 (and the second pinion leg member 483) (that is, the distance between the communication holes 482d, W3) can be increased. As a result, the maximum opening amount of the operation members 491 and 492 can be increased (see FIG. 27), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a composite operation unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, one pair of members for supporting the operating members 491, 492 are two pairs (two pairs of a pair of the first pinion leg members 482 and a pair of the second pinion leg members 483). Although the case where it is arranged has been described, the members for supporting the operating members 491 and 492 of the eighth embodiment are in one-to-one pair. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

85(a) to 85(c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment, in which the second opening/closing gear 452 and the slide rack member 7481 are displaced relative to the rear arm body 471. In order to explain the above, a state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 85(a), the opening/closing second gear 452 is counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 85(b), and in FIG. 85(c), the opening/closing second gear 452 is compared with FIG. 85(b). The gear 452 corresponds to the state of being rotated clockwise (clockwise), respectively.

Here, the combined motion unit 8400 in the eighth embodiment is different from the combined motion unit 400 in the first embodiment in that the first pinion leg member 482 is omitted and the shape of the second pinion leg member 8483 is changed. However, the other configurations are the same. In the following, only these different configurations will be described, and description of the same configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 85, the second pinion leg member 8483 in the eighth embodiment is different from the main body portion 483a of the second pinion leg member 8483 in the first embodiment in that the main body portion 8483a extends from the connecting hole 483d to the shaft supporting hole 483b. And a second connecting hole 8483e is formed at the tip of the extended portion (the other longitudinal end opposite to the shaft support hole 483b). The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operating members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the connection holes 483d and the second connection holes 8483d and fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the second pinion leg member 8483.

An urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) composed of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of second pinion leg members 8483 in a state where the urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) is elastically stretched and deformed, and the urging spring 484 elastically recovers. The force is configured to act in a direction in which the pair of second pinion leg members 8483 approach each other. Thus, when the operating members 491, 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491, 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. Can be suppressed.

Here, when the operation members 491 and 492 are opened and closed (see FIG. 27 ), each of the operation members 491 and 492 is supported at a plurality of locations (two or more locations) in order to stabilize the posture during the operation. Is preferably provided. In this case, in the case of the first embodiment, by connecting the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to each of the operation members 491 and 492, it is possible to support at a plurality of places (two places). However, in such a configuration, the number of parts of the members (the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483) for supporting the operation members 491 and 492 increases.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, since the connecting hole 483d and the second connecting hole 8483e are provided in the second pinion leg member 8483, each of the operating members 491 and 492 can be supported at a plurality of places (two places). As a result, the first pinion leg member 8482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the rear arm body 471 for pivotally supporting the pivot hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482, see FIGS. 21 and 22) is omitted. can do.

As a result, the weight of the combined operation unit 8400 as a whole can be reduced. Therefore, the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced, and the drive motor 530 can be downsized accordingly. it can.

Particularly, in the first pinion leg member 482 (and the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 for rotatably supporting the shaft support hole 482b of the first pinion leg member 482), the operation members 491 and 492 are the second. It is a member that is displaced around the second shaft 427 together with the operating members 491 and 492 when being rotated about the shaft 427 (see FIG. 27). Therefore, the reduction in weight by omitting the first pinion leg member 482 and the shaft portion 471c reduces the influence of inertial force when starting the rotational movement of the operating members 491 and 492 in the stopped state, and reduces the driving motor 530. Particularly contributes to downsizing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a composite operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed by utilizing the rotational movement of the first and second pinion leg members 482 and 483. However, opening and closing of the operating members 491 and 492 in the ninth embodiment. Uses the linear motion of the cam leg member 9483. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 86(a) to 86(c) are exploded perspective views of the combined operation unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment, and the relative displacement states of the opening/closing second gear 452 and the slide cam member 9481 with respect to the back arm body 9471. In order to explain the above, a state in which the operation members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is illustrated. 86(a) shows that the opening/closing second gear 452 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 86(b), and FIG. 86(c) shows opening/closing with respect to FIG. 86(b). The second gear 452 corresponds to the state of being respectively rotated clockwise (clockwise).

As shown in FIG. 86, the combined operation unit 7400 according to the ninth embodiment uses the open/close second gear 452 between the facing surfaces (front and back) of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (not shown). A slide cam member 9481 driven (slide displaced) and a cam leg member 9482 driven (slide displaced) by the slide cam member 9481 are provided.

The slide cam member 9481 and the cam leg member 9482 form a cam mechanism with these members, and linearly move the rotational movement of the opening/closing second gear 452 (the direction in which the pair of cam leg members 9482 approaches or separates from each other (see FIG. 86 ( b) The movement members 941 and 942 are opened/closed by conversion into slide displacement in the left/right direction).

The slide cam member 9481 includes a main body portion 9481a, a cam portion 9481b formed by projecting to the left and right sides of the main body portion 9481a, and a connecting projection 452d of the opening/closing second gear 452 formed at one longitudinal end of the main body portion 9481a. A connecting groove 481c to be inserted and a guide convex portion 9481d protruding from the front surface and the rear surface of the main body portion 9481a in a substantially rectangular cross section and extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 9481a are provided.

The guide convex portion 9481d is formed by shortening the extension length of the guide convex portion 481d in the first embodiment, and is slidable in the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472. Interpolated. Therefore, in the slide cam member 9481, the slide displacement direction is the extension direction of the guide groove 471d, 472d (that is, the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472) as in the case of the first embodiment. , FIG. 86(b) vertical direction).

The cam portion 9481b has a cam surface CS formed on the outer surface facing the second opening/closing gear 452 side. The cam surface CS is a sliding surface for pushing the main body portion 9482a of the cam leg member 9482 outward (in a direction away from the main body portion 481a), and is separated from the opening/closing second gear 452 as it is separated from the main body portion 9481a. It is formed as an inclined surface and is disposed (interposed) between the pair of cam leg members 9482 (main body portion 9482a) facing each other.

The cam leg member 9482 includes a main body portion 9482a, a shaft support hole 9482b formed through the main body portion 9482a, a first connecting hole 9482d1 formed through one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 9482a, and a second communication hole. The slide cam member 9481 is sandwiched between the pair of holes 9482d2, and the pair of holes 9482d2 are arranged in a facing position. The shaft support hole 9482b is formed as an oval (oblong hole)-shaped hole extending along a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 9482a (left and right direction in FIG. 86(b)).

In the assembled state, the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 is inserted into the shaft support hole 9482b. Here, as shown in FIG. 86( b ), the shaft portion 9471 c of the back arm body 9471 is an ellipse (oblong hole) shaped shaft body in the axial direction, and the major axis direction is the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471. (That is, the displacement direction of the slide cam member 9481) is arranged in a posture orthogonal to the direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 86(b)).

The dimension of the shaft portion 9471c of the back arm body 9471 in the minor axis direction (vertical dimension in FIG. 86(b)) is substantially equal to (or slightly smaller than) the dimension of the shaft support hole 9482b in the minor axis direction. On the other hand, the dimension in the major axis direction (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 86(b)) is set to be sufficiently smaller than the dimension in the major axis direction in the shaft support hole 9482b. As a result, the cam leg member 9482 is guided in the inner wall surface of the shaft support hole 9482b along the shaft portion 9471c of the rear arm body 9471 to move toward or away from the slide cam member 9482 (FIG. 86(b). ) Can be slid in the left-right direction).

The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a of the operating members 491 and 492 are rotatably inserted into the first communication hole 9483d1 and the second connection hole 9483d2 and fastened and fixed by fastening screws (see FIGS. 21 and 22). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the cam leg member 9483.

An urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) made of a coil spring is disposed between the pair of cam leg members 9482 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 is set. , A pair of cam leg members 9482 are configured to act in a direction in which they approach each other. Thus, when the operating members 491, 492 are closed in the opening/closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491, 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. Can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 86( b ), according to the combined operation unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, opening/closing is performed in a state where the pair of cam leg members 9482 is not slidably displaced against the urging force of the urging spring 484. In the second gear 452, the connecting protrusion 452d is pulled downward (downward in FIG. 86(b)) by the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting groove 481c and the The distance between the two axes 427 is the distance L1. Further, in the pair of cam leg members 9482, the distance between the first connecting holes 9482d1 is the distance W1.

When the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second shaft 427 with respect to the rear arm body 9471 from the state shown in FIG. 86(b), the connecting protrusion 452d is released. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide cam member 9481, the movement of the connecting projection 452d moves the slide cam member 9481 upward (upward in FIG. 86(a)) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace the slide.

That is, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the opening/closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the sliding displacement direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 86(a)). The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2<L1), and the slide cam member 9481 is slid upward by the amount of the difference between the distances L1 and L2.

With the upward sliding displacement of the slide cam member 9481, the cam portion 9481b (cam surface CS) of the slide cam member 9481 pushes and expands the facing interval of the pair of cam leg members 9482 (main body portion 9482a) in the expanding direction. Then, each of the pair of cam leg members 9482 is pushed outward (in the direction away from the main body portion 9481a of the slide cam member 9481). That is, the pair of cam leg members 9882 are slid and displaced in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the interval between the first connection holes 9482d1 is expanded to the interval W2. The same applies to the case of FIG. 86(c) in which the second opening/closing gear 7452 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise)), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

As described above, according to the ninth embodiment, since the cam leg member 9482 is provided with the first connecting hole 9482d1 and the second connecting hole 9482d2, one member (the cam leg member 9482) serves as the operating member 491, 492. Each can be supported at a plurality of places (two places), and for example, as in the case of the first embodiment, two members (first pinion leg 482 and second pinion leg 483, see FIG. 26). ) Need not be provided. As a result, similarly to the case of the eighth embodiment, the weight of the combined operation unit 9400 as a whole can be reduced, so that the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 (see FIG. 21) can be reduced and The drive motor 530 can be downsized.

In particular, according to the ninth embodiment, when starting the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 in the stopped state, the influence of the inertial force is reduced to reduce the influence of the drive motor as compared with the case of the eighth embodiment. The size of the 530 can be further reduced.

That is, as described above, the slide cam member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 are operated by the operation members 491, 492 when the operation members 491, 492 are rotated around the second shaft 427 (see FIG. 27 ). According to the ninth embodiment, a slide mechanism for the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (not shown) is adopted by using the cam mechanism according to the ninth embodiment. The arrangement position of the member 9481 and the pair of cam leg members 9482 is biased (closed) to the second shaft 427 side in the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 (vertical direction in FIG. 86(b)). be able to.

This makes it possible to reduce the weights of the rear arm body 9471 and the front arm body 472 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 86(b)) on the tip side (the side opposite to the second shaft 427), and the center of gravity of the combined operation unit 9400. Since the position of can be brought closer to the side of the second shaft 425, the influence of inertial force can be reduced by that much when starting the rotational movement of the operating members 491, 492 in the stopped state. As a result, the maximum output required for the drive motor 530 can be reduced, and the size can be further reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91, the first combined operation unit 500 and the second combined operation unit 600 in the tenth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, so that the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other. Although the case of being coupled is described, the coupling of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 in the tenth embodiment is performed by the first and second coupling members 10539, 10630. This is performed by engaging the parts 10539f and 10630f with each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the above-described first embodiment, it is necessary to set the angle α of the upper and lower surfaces 539e and 630a in relation to the angle θ of each of the link members 621 and 622. Since the first and second engaging members 10539, 10630 are coupled by utilizing the engagement between the first and second engaging portions 10539f, 10630f provided on the second engaging members 10539, 10630, the upper and lower surfaces 10539e , 10630a can be set to an arbitrary angle. That is, since the front view shape (projection shape) of the first coupling member 10539 and the front view shape (concave shape) of the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be arbitrarily set, the projection shape is greater than that of the first embodiment. The protrusion height in the shape and the recessed depth in the recessed shape can be further increased.

Thereby, according to the tenth embodiment, when the first and second coupling members 10539, 10630 are coupled (see FIG. 32 ), the first coupling member 10539 is disposed between the pair of second coupling members 10630. It is easy for the player to think of a mode in which the first coupling member 10539 enters and spreads the pair of second coupling members 10630 in a direction in which they are separated from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the opposing surfaces 630b). can do. As a result, it is possible to operate in a mode different from the player's expectation and enhance the effect of production. Hereinafter, detailed configurations of the first and second coupling members 10539 and 10630 will be described.

87(a) is a front view of the first coupling member 10539 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 87(b) is a bottom view of the first coupling member 10539 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87(a). is there. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along line LXXXVIIIa-LXXXVIIIa in FIG. 87A, and FIG. 88B is taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 87A. 88C is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539, and FIG. 88C is a cross-sectional view of the first coupling member 10539 taken along the line LXXXVIIIc-LXXXVIIIc of FIG. 88A.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the first coupling member 10539 forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, and abuts against the pair of second coupling members 10630 of the second coupling operation unit 10600. Is a member for forming a combined state (see FIG. 32), and the shape of the decorative portion 539c on the lower surface 10539e side in a front view (see FIG. 87(a)) has a center in the descending direction of the first coupling member 10539 (see FIG. It is formed in an inverted V shape protruding toward 87(a) downward).

The lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 has a step between the lower rear surface 10539e1 located on the rear side (lower side in FIG. 87(b)) of the first coupling member 10539 and the lower rear surface 10539e1. It is formed from an inclined lower surface 10539e2 which is connected and has a stepped portion and is inclined downward toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) of the first coupling member 10539. That is, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 retreats upward from the rear surface lower surface 10539e1 (upper side in FIG. 88(a)), and then descends and inclines downward (lower side in FIG. 88(a)) as it separates from the lower rear surface side 10539e1. Further, each of the back-side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is formed by combining two flat surfaces that descend and incline toward the center.

In this case, in the inclined lower surface 10539e2, the edge portion on the inclined front end side (lower end side, front side of FIG. 87(a) paper surface) of the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is in the entire width direction of the first coupling member 10539 (left/right direction of FIG. 87(a)). It is arranged at the same height position as the back side lower surface 10539e1 or at a height position slightly lower than the back side lower surface 10539e1 (downward in FIG. 87(a)). Thereby, in the front view of the first coupling member 10539, the back side lower surface 10539e1 (the opening of the recess 10539f described later) can be made invisible to the player. The inclined lower surface 10539e2 is in contact with the inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(a)), whereby the front of the second coupling member 10630 with respect to the first coupling member 10539. It is possible to regulate (position) relative displacement to (front side).

A recess 10539f having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view is provided at the center of the rear-side lower surface 10539e1 in the lateral width direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)). The concave portion 10539f is a portion where the convex portion 10630c protruding from the upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 is engaged at the coupling position, and the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 located on both sides in the longitudinal direction and the rear surface side. The rear side inner wall surface 10539f2 located on the lower side of FIG. 87(b).

The pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are formed as flat surfaces that are inclined so that the facing distance becomes wider toward the lower side (downward side, lower side in FIG. 88(c)) in the up-and-down direction of the first coupling member 10539. That is, the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 is formed in a shape that widens toward the advancing direction side when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. Note that the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 are in contact with the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 of the protrusions 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(b)). The relative displacement of the two-coupling member 10630 in the left-right direction (lateral width direction) can be regulated.

Further, the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed as a flat surface that is inclined toward the rear side as it goes downward (downward side, lower side in FIG. 88(a)) in the vertical direction of the first coupling member 10539. That is, the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 is inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2, and the facing distance between the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is lowered toward the coupling position of the first coupling member 10539. It is formed so as to gradually increase toward the advancing direction side (lower side in FIG. 88(a)). The rear inner wall surface 10539f2 is in contact with the rear outer wall surface 10630c2 of the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(a)), whereby the first coupling member 10539 is formed. It is possible to restrict (position) relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (back side).

89A is a partially enlarged front view of the second coupling operation unit 10600, and FIG. 89B is a top view of the second coupling member 10630 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIXb in FIG. 89A. 90A is a cross-sectional view of the second coupling member 10630 taken along line XCa-XCa of FIG. 89B, and FIG. 90B is taken along line XCb-XCb of FIG. 90A. It is sectional drawing of the 2 coupling member 10630.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second coupling member 10630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and that is coupled to the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position (FIG. 32). The front view shape (see FIG. 89A) on the upper surface 10630a side of the second coupling member 10630 is formed in a shape that descends and slopes toward the facing surface 630b. That is, when the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 10630 on the upper surface 10630a side is formed in a V shape having a depressed center (see FIG. 32). ).

The upper surface 10630a of the second coupling member 10630 is connected with a step between the rear side upper surface 10630a1 located on the rear side (upper side in FIG. 89(b)) of the second coupling member 10630 and the rear side upper surface 10630a1. The upper surface 10630a2 is formed from the connecting portion having the step and is inclined downward toward the front side of the second coupling member 10630 (downward in FIG. 89B). That is, the inclined upper surface 10630a2 rises upward (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) from the rear side upper surface 10630a1 and then descends and inclines downward (downward in FIG. 90(a)) as it separates from the rear side upper surface 10630a1. Further, each of the back side upper surface 10630a1 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is formed as a flat surface that descends and slopes toward the facing surface 630b.

It should be noted that the inclined lower surface 10539e2 of the first coupling member 10539 is brought into contact with the inclined upper surface 10630a2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(a)), whereby the second coupling member 10539 with respect to the second coupling member 10539 as described above. It is possible to regulate (position) the relative displacement of the coupling member 10630 to the front (front side).

On the rear-side upper surface 10630a1, a convex portion 10630c having a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view is provided so as to protrude on the side of the facing surface 630b. The convex portion 10630c is a portion that is engaged with a concave portion 10539f that is concavely provided in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 at the coupling position, and is located on one side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the facing surface 630b. An outer wall surface 10630c1 and a back surface outer wall surface 10630c2 located on the back surface side (upper side in FIG. 89(b)) are provided.

The left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are formed as flat surfaces that are inclined from the rear-side upper surface 10630a1 toward the facing surface 630b. That is, in the state where the pair of second coupling members 10630 couple the opposing surfaces 630b (see FIG. 91(b)), the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are tapered toward the first coupling member 10539. Formed into a shape. As described above, the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 are in contact with the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 in the recesses 10539f of the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (see FIG. 91(b)). The relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 with respect to 10539 in the left-right direction (width direction) can be restricted.

Further, the rear side outer wall surface 10630c2 is formed as a flat surface that is inclined downward from the top of the convex portion 10630a toward the rear side of the second coupling member 10630. That is, the rear outer wall surface 10630c2 is inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined upper surface 10630a2, and the facing distance between the rear outer wall surface 10630c2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 is the first coupling member 10539 side (upper side in FIG. 90(a)). It is formed so as to decrease gradually toward. Note that the rear-side outer wall surface 10630c2 is brought into contact with the rear-side inner wall surface 10539f2 of the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(a)), whereby the first coupling member 10539 is supported. It is possible to regulate (position) the relative displacement of the second coupling member 10630 to the rear (back side).

In this case, in the inclined upper surface 10630a2, the edge portion on the inclined base end side (upper end side, right side in FIG. 90A) is convex in the entire width direction of the second coupling member 10630 (left and right direction in FIG. 89B). It is arranged at a height position (above FIG. 90(a)) above the top of the portion 10630c. Thereby, in the front view of the second coupling member 10630, the protrusion 10630c can be made invisible to the player.

Here, the convex portion 10630c has a thickness dimension in the front-rear direction (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 90A) that decreases toward the protruding tip. That is, the outer wall surface of the front surface of the convex portion 10630c (on the opposite side of the rear outer wall surface 10630c2, on the left side in FIG. 90A) is formed to be inclined in the same direction as the inclined upper surface 10630a2. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are coupled, the convex portion 10630f of the second coupling member 10630 can be easily inserted into the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a coupling operation of the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 will be described.

91(a) and 91(b) are cross-sectional views of the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 in a state of being arranged at the coupling position. Note that FIG. 91(a) corresponds to FIG. 88(a) and FIG. 90(a), and FIG. 91(b) corresponds to FIG. 88(b) and FIG. 90(b).

As described above, the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled to each other by moving the pair of second coupling members 10630 close to each other from the retracted position (see FIG. 31) due to the standing of the link mechanism. By arranging them side by side and lowering the first coupling member 10539 toward the pair of second coupling members 10630 disposed side by side on the left and right thereof, as shown in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b). The first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled to each other.

In this case, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 includes the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1, and the left and right outer wall surfaces abutting on the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the recess 10539f. 10630c1 is provided in each of the convex portions 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 10630, and the pair of left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 and the pair of left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 progress when the first coupling member 10539 is lowered toward the coupling position. Since the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 of the concave portion 10539f are formed in the left and right outer wall surfaces 10630c1 of the convex portion 10630c in the left-right direction (the lateral width direction, the figure 91(b) left and right) By contacting from both sides, the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be displaced in a direction in which they approach each other (direction in which the facing surfaces 630b are brought into contact with each other). That is, the pair of second coupling members 10630 can be coupled while reliably suppressing the formation of a gap between them (between the opposing surfaces 630a).

As described above, the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539 is formed with the inclined lower surface 10539e2 that is continuous with the front surface of the first coupling member 10539, and the upper surface 10630a of the pair of second coupling members 10630 has its first surface. The inclined upper surface 10630a2 that is continuous with the front surface of the two-coupling member 10630 is formed, and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are inclined in the same direction (inclined at the same inclination angle in the present embodiment), and thus are arranged at the combined position. In this state, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be brought into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91(a).

Even if the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 cannot be brought into complete contact with each other due to dimensional tolerance or the like, the inclined surfaces are opposed to each other, so that the first coupling member 10539 And the player can be made to recognize the front view shape so that there is no gap between the opposing second coupling members 10630. That is, even if there is a gap between the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, the background is not visually recognized through the gap, and the player can visually recognize the inclined upper surface 10630a2. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of production by coupling the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 at the coupling position.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the concave portion 10539f of the first coupling member 10539 and the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630 are located on the back side of the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, and the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 are provided. Is arranged so as to be invisible when the player looks in front. Therefore, when the first coupling member 10539 and the pair of second coupling members 10630 are coupled at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 10630 are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other (the direction in which the facing surfaces 630b are brought into contact with each other). It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the structural portion.

Thereby, when the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the pair of second coupling members 10630, such a coupling operation is different from the player's expectation (that is, the lower surface 10539e side front view shape of the first coupling member 10539). Is formed into a protruding shape, and the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 10630 on the upper surface 10630a side is formed into a concave shape, so that the first coupling member 10539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 10630, The player recalls a mode in which the first coupling member 10539 pushes and expands the pair of second coupling members 10630 in the direction in which they are separated from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the mutually facing surfaces 630b). It can be easily performed in a manner in which the coupling member 10630 is coupled without a gap), and the effect of production can be enhanced.

When the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a are entirely flush with each other like the first connecting member 539 and the second connecting member 630 in the first embodiment, the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recesses 1039f) and the left and right It is impossible to make the outer wall surface 10630f1 (the convex portion 10630f) invisible to the player in a front view, and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 are located on the front side of the lower surface 10539e and the upper surface 10630a as in the present embodiment ( This is only made possible by providing the front part, the left part of FIG. 88(a) and the left part of FIG. 90(a) (that is, the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2 allow the left and right inner wall surfaces 10539f1 (recesses 1039f) and the left and right sides). The outer wall surface 10630f1 (the convex portion 10630f) can be made invisible to the player in a front view).

The back side inner wall surface 10539f2 is formed in the recess 10539f of the first coupling member 10539, and the back side outer wall surface 10630c2 that abuts on the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 at the coupling position (see FIG. 91(a)) is the second. Since the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back side outer wall surface 10630c2 are formed on the convex portion 10630c of the coupling member 10630 and are inclined in different directions with respect to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2, respectively, The direction in which the second coupling member 10630 is positioned (the direction in which relative displacement is regulated) is determined by the direction in which the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back side outer wall surface 10630c2 are in contact with the back side inner wall surface 10539f2 and the back side outer wall surface 10630c2. It can be opposite to the direction of contact.

Accordingly, the second coupling member 10630 can be positioned with respect to the first coupling member 10539 in the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front surface and the back surface, the left-right direction in FIG. 91(a)). Not only is it possible to suppress the occurrence of a step in the front-rear direction with the joint portion of the member 10630 (the inclined lower surface 10539e2 and the inclined upper surface 10630a2) being flush, but also to hold the first coupling member 10539 and the second coupling member 10630 at the positioning position in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress relative displacement and rattling after being arranged at the coupling position.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the insertion shaft 2772 of the link member 2770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 so as to be axially displaceable, and as described in the third embodiment, the link. The member 3770 is brought into contact with the inner wall surface of the third passage P3 (the front surface 2711a of the intermediate case body 2710) and the main body 771 of the link member 3770 is elastically deformed (that is, the second embodiment and the third embodiment. The form may be combined).
The gaming machine 8 and the gaming machine 9 may be combined.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 are formed as through holes in the main body portions 451a and 462a in the combined operation units 400 and 7400 to 9400 will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 may be recesses having a bottom. Even in the case of a bottomed recess, by a method similar to that of the above-described embodiment, by inserting a jig into the recess, the mounting position and the like can be positioned, while comparing with the case of forming as a through hole. Since the rigidity of the opening/closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be secured, the durability thereof can be improved.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the connecting protrusion 452d is disposed on the opening/closing second gear 452, 7452, and the connecting grooves 481c and 7481c through which the connecting protrusion 452d is inserted are the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481. Although the case where they are arranged is described above, the arrangement is not necessarily limited to this, and the arrangement positions thereof may be exchanged. That is, the connecting protrusion 452d is arranged on the slide rack members 481, 7481 or the slide cam member 9481, and the connecting grooves 481c, 7481c through which the connecting protrusion 452d is inserted are arranged on the opening/closing second gears 452, 7452. It may be configured. In this case, the connecting grooves 481c and 7481c provided on the second opening/closing second gears 452 and 7452 are convex toward the slide rack members 481 and 7481 or the slide cam member 9481 where the connecting protrusion 452d is provided. It is preferable to be curved in an arc shape. This is because the amount of movement of the connecting protrusion 452d accompanying the rotation of the second opening/closing second gears 452, 7452 can be increased, and the maximum amount of movement of the slide rack members 481, 7481 or slide cam member 9481 can be increased accordingly.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the connection groove 7481c is curved in an arc shape with a constant curvature has been described. However, the shape is not necessarily limited to this, and the shape of the connection groove 7481c may be a combination of arcs having a plurality of types of curvatures. You may form it. Accordingly, for example, by making the curvatures of the first portion and the second portion of the connection groove 7481c different, the slide rack with respect to the rotation (rotation speed) of the opening/closing second gear 452 by a unit angle. The sliding amount (moving speed) of the member 7481 can be made different when the connecting protrusion 452d passes the first portion and when it passes the second portion. As a result, it is possible to change the open/close operation (open/close speed) of the operating members 491 and 492 while rotating the open/close second gear 452 (drive motor 430) at a constant rotation speed. The connecting groove 7481c may be formed by combining a curved portion curved in an arc shape and a linear straight portion (a part of the connecting groove 7481c is a linear portion extending linearly). It may be).

In the above-described first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400, by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different, the operation members 491 and 492. A case has been described in which the effect of opening and closing is improved by opening and closing in a non-parallel manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation is performed with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 having the same length. It is naturally possible to open and close the members 491 and 492 in parallel. Alternatively, the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear portion 483c of the second pinion leg member 483 have different gear characteristics (that is, the rotation angle associated with the slide of the slide rack member 481 is the first pinion leg member). By setting the second pinion leg member 483 to be larger than 482), the opening/closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 may be performed in parallel. In this case, two different types of gears corresponding to the gear portions 482c and 483c are provided on the rack portion 481b of the slide rack members 481 and 7481.

Alternatively, in the above-described first to eighth embodiments, the case where the connection hole 482d and the second connection hole 8483e are formed in a long hole shape in the combined operation units 400, 7400, 8400 has been described. The dimensions in the directions may be set as follows, and the opening/closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 may be performed in parallel. That is, focusing on the operation member 491, when the pinion leg members 482, 483, and 8483 are rotated, one pair of the connection raising portions 491a of the operation member 491 has one connection raising portion 491a formed in the connection hole 493d. While being rotatably supported, the other connecting raised portion 491a is rotatably and slidably supported in the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8483e in the major axis direction. In this case, in a state before the second opening/closing gear 452 is rotated (for example, refer to FIG. 26B), a virtual line connecting the pair of connection raising portions 491a of the operation member 491 and the second opening/closing gear 452 after being rotated. In a state (see, for example, FIG. 26A and FIG. 26C), the connecting hole 482d and the second connecting hole 8483e are arranged so that the virtual line connecting the pair of connecting raised portions 491a of the operating member 491 becomes parallel. Set the major axis dimension.

In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c of the first pinion leg member 482 and the rack portion 481b and the second pinion leg member 483. The case where the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 is the same as the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 is not limited to this. The gear ratio and the gear ratio between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the second pinion leg member 483 may be different gear ratios. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 can be performed in a non-parallel opening/closing manner to enhance the effect.

In the first to seventh embodiments and the tenth embodiment described above, in the combined operation units 400 and 7400, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are meshed with the rack portion 481b is described. However, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 is engaged with the rack portion 481b, and the other is not engaged with the rack portion 481b. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 may only be rotatably supported. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the operation members 491, 492 can be performed in a non-parallel opening/closing manner to enhance the effect.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the combined operation units 400, 7400 to 9400, as the opening/closing operation and the rotating operation of the operation members 491, 492, the rotating first gear 461 and the opening/closing first gear 451 are continuously operated from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. However, the operation is not limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the operation unit within the range of the rotation angles θ0 to θ4.

In each of the above-described embodiments, in the first combination operation unit 500, 4500 to 6500, the case where the insertion shafts 531c are arranged in two rows with three as one row on the back surface of the A-layer base plate 531 has been described. However, the number of the insertion shafts 531c in each row may be two or less, or may be four or more.

In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the central insertion shaft of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531. Although the case where the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are connected to the 531c has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically is described. The first link member 541 and the second link member 542 may be connected to the side insertion shaft 531c. The same applies to the fourth embodiment, and the second link member 542 may be connected to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically.

In the first to third embodiments and the seventh to tenth embodiments, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft that are inserted into the shaft support hole 541a and the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541 are inserted. The retaining ring E is attached to the shaft 531c as a retainer or a fastening screw is fastened, while the retaining ring E is attached as a retainer or a fastening screw is fastened to the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connecting hole 541b. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least one of these three places is provided with a retaining ring E as a retainer or a fastening screw. ..

In the second and third embodiments, the case where the passage P is formed by combining straight passages (first passage P1, second passage P2, and third passage P3) in a top view (see FIG. 65) will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the link members 2770 and 3770 are erected substantially vertically and the ring-forming member 790 is arranged at the coupling position, the offset amount to the front side (front) is at least It suffices that it is larger than the offset amount to the front side (front) when the circle forming member 790 is arranged at the retracted position, and the shape of the passage P from the retracted position to the coupling position can be arbitrarily set. For example, only the third passage P3 may be formed as a passage curved in an arc shape in a top view. If at least the offset amount to the front side at the coupling position is larger than the offset amount to the front side at the retracted position, the drive required to hold the elevating base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) at the coupling position. It is possible to achieve both the suppression of the energy consumption of the motor 740 and the suppression of the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 necessary for moving the lifting base body 2780 (annular forming member 790) up and down between the coupling position and the retracted position. it can.

In the tenth embodiment, in the coupling position, the convex portions 10630c of the pair of second coupling members 1630 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the concave portion 10539f that receives the pair of convex portions 10630c arranged adjacent to each other is an integral concave portion. Although the case where the recess is provided on the back surface lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 as the (1 recess) has been described, the invention is not limited to this and the protrusions 10630c of the pair of coupling members 1630 are not necessarily disposed at the coupling position. Are spaced apart from each other, and separate recesses (recesses of 2) capable of respectively receiving the pair of projections 10630c are recessed in the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539. good.

In the tenth embodiment, in the lower surface 10539e of the first coupling member 10539, a surface (hereinafter, referred to as “connecting surface”) that connects the back-side lower surface 10539e1 and the inclined lower surface 10539e2 is in the vertical direction (ascending/descending of the first coupling member 10539). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, the connection surface of the first coupling member 10539 is preferably inclined in the direction opposite to the inclined lower surface 10539e2 (that is, the same direction as the back side inner wall surface 10539f2). When the first coupling member 10539 is coupled to the second coupling member 10630, the first coupling member 10539 is relatively affected by the sway due to disturbance or the like, and the first coupling member 10539 is relatively front side (front, front view). 91(a) left side), the connecting surface of the first coupling member 10539 is brought into contact with the rising end (right end of FIG. 91(a)) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 of the second coupling member 10630. be able to. Thereby, with the descending operation of the first coupling member 10539 with respect to the second coupling member 10630, the rising side end (corner) of the inclined upper surface 10630a2 can be slid along the inclined surface, and both coupling members 10539, 10630. Can be guided to a regular position (positioned in the front-back direction).

In the tenth embodiment, when the back surface lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 is a flat surface and the height positions in the vertical direction (the vertical direction of the first coupling member 10539) are arranged at the same height position as a whole. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the height position of a part of the back side lower surface 10539e1 may be arranged below the height position of the other part. Specifically, only the portion of the back side lower surface 10539e1 of the first coupling member 10539 located on the front side (front side, left side in FIG. 91(a)) of the convex portion 10630c of the second coupling member 10630, The height position of the convex portion 10630c is located below (on the lower side in FIG. 91(a)) the portion located on the back side (rear side, right side in FIG. 91(a)). As a result, when lowering the first coupling member 10539 with respect to the second coupling member 10630, the portion of the back side lower surface 10539e1 where the height position is arranged downward (the front side of the convex portion 10630c (see FIG. 91 ( (a) The portion located on the left side) is brought into contact with the outer wall surface of the convex portion 10630c (the outer wall surface on the opposite side of the back side outer wall surface 10630c2, the left side in FIG. 91(a)) from the other portion (the convex portion 10630c). It is possible to precede the timing at which the rear surface (the portion located on the right side in FIG. 91(a)) abuts on the outer wall surface of the convex portion 10630c (back surface outer wall surface 10630c2), and as a result, the reliability of both coupling members 10539 and 10630 can be ensured. Can be achieved.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

A moving member movably formed between a first position and a second position, a driving unit for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit for the moving member. In a gaming machine including a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member, and a transmission state of the driving force from the driving unit to the moving member. And a transfer state is formed after the cut-off state is formed when at least the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmission means. The driving force required by the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the size of the driving means can be reduced.

That is, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the stationary object is moved. Therefore, a force exceeding the inertial force generated in the moving member at the start of the movement is applied. Since it is necessary to act on such a moving member, the driving force required for the driving means becomes large. As a result, the size of the driving means has been increased (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the action of inertia that acts to maintain the motion state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means does not move the moving member. It is small compared to the driving force required at the start. In other words, it can be said that, after the movement of the moving member is started, the driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started, the transmission state is formed after the interruption state is formed by the transmission means, so that the driving is performed. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. That is, since the transmission means first forms the cutoff state, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving means in an unloaded state, and to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving means. .. After that, the transmission means forms a transmission state (switches from the cut-off state to the transmission state), so that the driving means drives the driving force to the moving means in a state where the driving state is energized (a large inertial force). Can be transmitted. With this, even if the driving unit is downsized, the movement of the moving member can be started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it is possible to suppress the state in which the driving unit having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used.

In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed so that the teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed on at least a part or the entire circumference thereof and the drive means-side member can be meshed with the teeth. A moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member are formed at least partially or entirely around the moving member side member, and at least the driving means side member or the moving member side member. One is provided with a non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed and which cannot be meshed with the other of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member, and the gaming machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, the transmission means is formed so that the driving means side member and the moving member side member can mesh with each other. Therefore, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the driving means side The member on the moving member side meshed with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member (a transmission state is formed) via the rotation of the member on the moving member side. In this case, since the non-forming portion in which the teeth are not formed is formed in one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the driving means side member is rotated. When the non-formation portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot mesh with each other, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked. (A cutoff state is formed).

Therefore, when the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started, the non-formation portion is first used to form the blocking state, so that the driving unit side member can be idle. Therefore, the drive means can be driven in a no-load state, and the drive state of the drive means (inertia force in the drive means side member) can be given. After that, the idling driving means side member is meshed with the moving member side member (that is, a transmission state is formed), so that the driving means starts the driving of the moving means in a state where the driving state is energized. be able to. With this, even if the driving unit is downsized, the movement of the moving member can be started.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the transmission means includes the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and at least one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is provided. Since the non-forming part is provided so that the teeth are not formed, the disconnection state and the transmission state are determined according to the relative rotational position (rotational position of the non-forming part) between the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. You can switch between and. That is, an actuator device is not required in the configuration for achieving such switching of states, and only the gears can be used. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, the teeth formed on the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for transmission of power through meshing with the teeth of the mating member. In this case, the shape of the tooth trace is not limited. For example, the teeth of the gears illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. Examples of gears include spur gears, helical gears, helical gears, bevel gears, spiral bevel gears, screw gears, crown gears, miter gears, internal gears, hypoid gears, and worm gears. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

In the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member face each other, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a cutoff state is formed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member includes a non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-moving member side member Since the blocking portions are formed by the forming portions facing each other, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member is improved. It is possible to improve.

That is, in the case where only one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has the non-forming portion (that is, the other of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has teeth formed over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction). It is necessary that the non-forming portion is retracted to a position where meshing with the other tooth of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be set back toward the rotation axis side with respect to the root of one of the teeth of the driving unit side member or the moving member side member. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-forming portion increases, so that the outer diameter of the non-forming portion of one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member decreases, and as a result, one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member Causes a decrease in rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, each of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member has a non-forming portion, and thus both non-forming portions are retracted to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-forming portion. It is enough if there is. Specifically, both the non-formation portions can be located between the valley bottom and the crest of the teeth of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to retract the portion toward the rotary shaft side from the valley bottom. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-formed portions of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member is It is possible to improve.

In the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis of one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. The non-forming portion on the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction as the driving means side member or the moving member side member is formed. A gaming machine A4, which is shaped so as to project toward a non-forming portion on one side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion provided in each of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member is a non-forming unit in one of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member. The drive unit side member or the moving member side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and the non-forming portion on the other side of the drive unit side member or the moving member side member is the drive unit side member or the moving unit side member. A shape protruding toward a non-formed portion formed on one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member as it is separated from the other tooth of the member side member in the circumferential direction (that is, the driving means side member or the moving member side member Of the driving means side member or the moving member side member while avoiding interference between these two non-formation parts and enabling the formation of the cutoff state. The outer diameter of the other non-formed portion can be increased to further increase the rigidity of the other of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are respectively the driving unit at the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5, wherein the non-formed portion of the side member and the non-formed portion of the movable member side member face each other to form the cutoff state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the drive unit side member and the moving member side member form a cutoff state at two positions of the first phase position and the second phase position. Therefore, by making the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member at the first position to the second position is started. Not only when the moving member in the second position starts to move to the first position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving unit is changed. It can have momentum (inertial force). That is, even if the driving force that the driving unit can generate is small, the movement of the moving member can be started both when the moving member is at the first position and when it is at the second position.

A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting means transmits a driving force of the driving means to the second moving member, and the transmitting means transmits the driving force to the second moving member. A gaming machine B1 capable of simultaneously forming a blocking state in which transmission of a driving force to the first moving member is blocked.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. To be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a shut-off state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is shut off. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the one driving means.

That is, when the movement of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one driving means, in the conventional product, there are two driving states: a state in which the driving means generates the driving force and a state in which the driving force is stopped. By forming the structure, since the operation mode of the first moving member and the second moving member is switched, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member both move or both stop However, it was impossible to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member. Therefore, in order to stop the first moving member while moving the second moving member, a driving means for moving the first moving member and a driving means for moving the second moving member are separately provided. It was necessary (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-139766).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode in which the first moving member is stopped while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the one driving means, so that the first moving member and the second moving member It is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost while making it possible to exert the effect of moving and stopping the members.

In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits a driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and a driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. A second transmission member, wherein the first transmission member has a first driving means side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the first driving means. A first moving member side member which is formed to be meshable with the side member and has teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member on at least a part or the entire circumference thereof; And at least one of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member is incapable of meshing with the other of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member because the teeth are not formed. A gaming machine B2 having a non-forming part.

According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and is transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmitting member. The first moving member and the second moving member are moved respectively.

In this case, the first transmitting member is formed so that the first driving member side member and the first moving member side member can be meshed with each other, so that when the first driving member side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving member, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member, and the first moving member Are moved. In addition, since one of the first driving unit side member and the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving unit side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, When the non-formation portion is arranged at the meshing position of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member are unable to mesh and the driving means The transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed). That is, the formation of the blocking state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Accordingly, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the one driving unit.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member includes the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, and the first driving means side member or Since the tooth is not formed on at least one of the first moving member side members and the non-forming portion is provided, the relative rotational position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (of the non-forming portion). It is possible to switch between the cutoff state and the transmission state according to the rotational position). That is, an actuator device is not required in the configuration for achieving such switching of states, and only the gears can be used. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2, the second transmission member is moved from the driving means to the second transmission member when the transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member is formed by the first transmission member. A gaming machine B3, which is capable of forming a shut-off state that shuts off the transmission of the driving force to the moving member.

According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member is moved from the drive means to the second movement member when the transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the first movement member is formed by the first transmission member. Since it is possible to form the cut-off state that cuts off the transmission of the driving force, the operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the first moving member can be achieved by the one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means), while moving the first moving member The operation mode in which the second moving member is stopped can be achieved by the one driving means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost, increase the variation of the operation modes of the movement and stop of the first moving member and the second moving member, and enhance the effect of the production. it can.

In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion formed so as to be movable along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion extend from the drive means to the second moving member. The pin portion is moved along the groove portion so that a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second moving member can be formed. The gaming machine B4, wherein the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion so that a blocking state for blocking the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member can be formed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member can be formed. On the other hand, by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a blocking state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked, so that the driving force of the driving means is moved by the first movement. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. While stopping the second moving member, when the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is blocked by the first transmitting member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the driving means It is possible to move the second moving member by transmitting the driving force of the above to the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. A tooth that is formed to be meshable and that transmits the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member is formed on at least a part or the entire circumference and the pin portion is arranged. The second moving member side member and the groove portion are arranged, and the pin portion moves along the groove portion in accordance with the rotation of the second moving member side member, thereby approaching or advancing to the second moving member side member. A groove arrangement member for moving the second moving member in a separating direction, and the groove portion of the groove arrangement member is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the second moving member side member. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine B5, when the second driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the second moving member side member meshed with the second driving means side member is rotated, the second The pin member of the moving member side member is moved along the groove of the groove arranging member. As a result, the groove portion arranging member is moved toward or away from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved along with the movement of the groove portion arranging member. In this case, since the groove portion of the groove portion disposing member is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the second moving member side member, the amount of movement of the groove portion disposing member due to the rotation of the second moving member side member is large. Then, the maximum movement amount of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member includes a second driving means side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the second driving means side member. A second tooth which is formed so as to be meshable and which transmits the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member at least partially or entirely and at which the groove portion is provided. The moving member side member and the pin portion are provided, and the pin portion moves along the groove along with the rotation of the second moving member side member so as to approach or approach the second moving member side member. A pin portion arranging member that moves in a direction of separating and moves the second moving member, and a groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the pin portion arranging member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine B6, the second driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the second moving member side member meshed with the second driving means side member is rotated, the second The pin portion of the pin arrangement member is moved along the groove of the moving member side member. As a result, the pin portion arranging member is moved toward or away from the second moving member side member, and the second moving member is moved along with the movement of the pin portion arranging member. In this case, since the groove portion of the second moving member side member is curved in an arc shape protruding toward the pin portion arranging member, the amount of movement of the pin portion arranging member due to the rotation of the second moving member side member. Can be increased, and the maximum movement amount of the second moving member can be increased accordingly.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the gaming machine is movably supported by the first moving member and is provided between the groove arranging member or the pin portion arranging member and the second moving member, A second transmission member that transmits the movement of the groove portion arrangement member or the pin portion arrangement member to the second movement member to move the second movement member is provided, and a plurality of portions of the second transmission member are moved to the second movement. A gaming machine B7 characterized by being connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine B7, when the groove portion arranging member or the pin portion arranging member is moved toward or away from the second moving member side member, the groove portion arranging member or the pin portion arranging member moves first. It is transmitted to the second moving member via the second transmitting member, and the second moving member is moved. In this case, in order to allow the second moving member to move in a stable posture, it is preferable that the second transmitting member is connected to a plurality of places (for example, two places) of the second moving member. However, in the configuration in which the second transmission member is provided at each of the connection points to the second movement member, the number of members for movably supporting the second transmission member on the first movement member increases (the above-mentioned example). Then, two members for supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member are required).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, since a plurality of locations of the second transmission member are connected to the second moving member, it is possible to reduce the number of second transmission members while ensuring the number of connection locations. (For example, when securing two connection points, the gaming machine B7 does not require two second transmission members, and the second transmission member can be reduced to one). The number of members for movably supporting the second transmission member on the first moving member can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the weight of the first moving member as a whole can be suppressed and the weight thereof can be reduced. Therefore, the drive means is moved to move the first moving member accordingly. The required maximum output can be reduced and the drive means can be downsized. Particularly, the weight reduction of the moving member contributes to downsizing of the driving unit by reducing the influence of inertial force when starting the movement of the first moving member in the stopped state.

In the gaming machine B7, the first moving member is rotatively moved about the rotation axis of the first moving member side member, and the second transmitting member is movable with respect to the first moving member. The gaming machine B8, wherein the supported position is on the rotation axis side of the first moving member side member with respect to the longitudinal center of the first moving member.

According to the gaming machine B8, the second moving member is movably supported by the first moving member, and the first moving member and the second moving member are connected via the second transmitting member, so that the first moving member. When is moved, the second moving member is moved together with the first moving member. That is, the load of the drive means required to move the first moving member is the total weight of both the first moving member and the second moving member. In this case, according to the gaming machine B8, the position at which the second transmission member is movably supported with respect to the first moving member is the rotation axis of the first moving member side member rather than the longitudinal center of the first moving member. Since it is on the side, the second moving member can be brought closer to the rotation axis side of the first moving member. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the position of the center of gravity of the structure in which both the first moving member and the second moving member are integrated can be brought closer to the rotary shaft side of the first moving member. When the movement of the first moving member in the stopped state is started, the influence of inertial force can be reduced. As a result, the maximum output required for the driving means can be reduced, and the driving means can be downsized.

In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second transmission member is a second driving means side member in which teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least partially or entirely, and the second At least a part or the entire circumference of the teeth, which are formed on the driving means side member so as to be able to mesh with each other and which transmit the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member, are formed, and the groove portion or the pin is formed. A second moving member side member in which one of the parts is arranged, the second driving unit side member is arranged coaxially with the first driving unit side member of the first transmission member, and 2. A game machine B7, wherein the second moving member side member is arranged coaxially with the first moving member side member of the first transmission member.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B4 to B6, the second driving member side member of the second transmission member and the second moving member side member are the first driving means side of the first transmission member. Since the member and the first moving member side member are arranged coaxially with each other, backlash between the second driving member side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmitting member and the first transmitting member first member Backlash between the driving unit side member and the first moving member side member can be generated in the same direction, and thereby, it is possible to prevent the production timing of the first moving member and the second moving member from deviating from each other. it can.

In the gaming machine B6, the second driving member side member of the second transmitting member may be fixed to the first driving member side member of the first transmitting member. According to this, the second driving member side member of the second transmitting member is fixed to the first driving member side member of the first transmitting member, so that both the first driving member side member and the second driving member side member are provided. A member for transmitting the driving force of the driving unit is not required, and a member for transmitting the driving force to either the first driving unit side member or the second driving unit side member is sufficient. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced or the parts can be downsized to reduce the product cost.

Here, fixing the first driving means side member to the second driving means side member means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first driving means side member and the second driving means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first driving means side member and the second driving means side member may be formed separately and fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed separately, as a method for fixing them, for example, adhesion with an adhesive, ultrasonic welding, fastening with screws, or a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or hole provided on the other side , A combination of these, and the like are exemplified.

A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is formed with at least a part or the entire circumference of teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and the drive means-side member is formed so as to be meshable with the drive means-side member. A moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member are formed on at least a part or the entire circumference, wherein the driving means side member and the moving member side member are When the non-forming portions are provided at the meshing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side is provided. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that a non-forming portion of the member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a non-forming portion of the driving means side member.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshed with the driving means side member is rotated, and with the rotation of the moving member side member. The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing positions, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are Is unable to mesh. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the drive unit to the moving member is blocked (a blocked state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-formed part of the moving member side member is formed so as to be able to contact the non-formed part of the driving means side member, the non-formed part of the moving member side member contacts the non-formed part of the driving means side member. The rotation of the moving member side member in the contact direction can be restricted. That is, the movement of the moving member can be restricted.

In this case, the stopping of the moving member has conventionally been performed as follows. That is, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is provided, and when the sensor device detects the rotation of the driving means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotational position, When it is judged that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, the driving amount of the driving unit (for example, the number of steps when the driving unit is configured by a step motor) is detected (counted), and when the driving amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member ends the moving range. It is determined that the driving force has been reached, and the driving of the driving unit is stopped (for example, see JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, due to defective detection of the rotational position or the driving amount due to the influence of electrical noise, the driving member may not be stopped even though the moving member reaches the end of the moving range. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and the movement of the moving member is regulated by the stopper when the driving means is not stopped properly. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the moving member is regulated by the stopper, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the driving means. There is also a risk that the driving means may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the driving unit side member and the moving member side member are incapable of meshing with each other. Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is interrupted, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means is continuously generated. Therefore, it is possible to avoid damage due to a collision between the moving member and another member. Further, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means and the driving means is idling, so that an excessive load is applied to the driving means. It can be avoided.

Further, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is provided with a movable member that is formed so as to be movable, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the movable member, and the movable member is moved within a predetermined movement range by the drive force of the drive unit. There is a gaming machine that allows it (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-120640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is set to the raised position and gravity acts on the moving member arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (falls) by the action of gravity. You need to avoid it. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the driving means to the gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is set to the end of the moving range). Since it has a holding structure, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the drive means side member. Thus, the rotation of the moving member side member (movement of the moving member) can be restricted. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, so that the moving member cannot be held at the end using the driving force of the driving means. The contact of the non-forming portion can be used to mechanically hold the moving member at the end of the moving range. As a result, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member and abutted against each other. In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the non-forming part of the driving means side member and the non-forming part of the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. When the moving members are brought into contact with each other (that is, when the moving unit is arranged at the end of the moving range), the moving member-side member is formed in a shape capable of restricting rotation in both directions. The moving member when the end of the moving range is reached, as compared with the case where the rotation of the side member is regulated in only one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity). Since the vibration can be converged, the moving member can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range, and the moving member can be held at the end of the moving range in a stable state, the moving member that should be in a stopped state is affected by an external force (for example, a game). It is possible to suppress vibration and displacement due to an external force generated by a person hitting or rocking the game board.

In the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the driving means side member as the center, and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is the drive portion. When arranged at the meshing position of the device side member and the moving member side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-forming part of the drive means side member. Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a slightly larger diameter.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed to be curved in an arc shape with the rotation axis of the driving means side member as the center, and is formed on the moving member side. The non-formation part of the member is an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the drive means side member when the drive means side member and the moving member side member are arranged at the meshing position, and the non-formation of the drive means side member Since the curved portion is formed in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the circular arc of the portion, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means side member, and Both can be easily contacted by surface contact. As a result, the non-formed portions are brought into smooth contact with each other, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and is stopped can be moderated, and the contact pressure between the non-formed portions is reduced, The durability of the driving unit side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

Further, since the non-formed portion of the driving unit side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member is not affected by the rotational position (phase) of the driving unit side member. The non-forming portion can be brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving unit side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be restricted. That is, even if the drive-side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of its moving range, the rotation of the moving member-side member can be restricted in both directions, and as a result, the moving member can be held at the end of its moving range. can do.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear through the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member through the plurality of fastened parts, one structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at these plural points. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the driving means side member when the non-formation portion is brought into contact with the non-formation portion of the driving means side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is secured. On the other hand, for example, when the wall thickness is increased, the weight is increased, and when the material having high rigidity is adopted, the material cost is increased. However, according to the gaming machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is used (that is, the moving member is moved Since it is integrated with the member), the rigidity of the moving member side member is increased, so that it is not necessary to increase the thickness of the moving member side member or adopt a high-rigidity material. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

In the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is arranged at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with a non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is moved because the fastened portion is arranged at a position facing the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member being sandwiched therebetween. It is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the portion that receives a reaction force from the driving unit side member when the non-forming unit member-side member is brought into contact with the driving unit side member non-forming unit. As a result, both weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member side member and improvement in durability of the moving member side member can be further achieved.

It is more preferable that the fastened portion of the moving member gear is arranged at a position opposed to the rotation shaft of the driving means side member with the non-forming portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member side member when the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is the rotation shaft of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. Since it is acted along the line that connects the drive means side member, the fastened portion is arranged at a position facing the rotation axis of the drive means side member, thereby increasing the rigidity of the portion receiving the reaction force from the drive means side member. This is because it can be exhibited even more.

A gaming machine comprising a moving member rotatably formed around a first axis between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member. The moving member includes a rotating member that is rotated about the second shaft by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and a pin member that is disposed on the rotating member and is eccentrically located with respect to the second shaft. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is a recess formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and capable of receiving the pin member. At least in the first position, the pin member is received in the recess, so that the moving member is mechanically held in the first position.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving unit is generated, the rotating member is rotated about the second shaft by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and the pin member disposed on the rotating member is used. Are guided along the guide groove of the moving member. Since the pin member is located eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove. It is rotated around one axis.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first shaft, a moving member that is rotated about the first shaft, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the moving member. There is a game machine that rotates the moving member between the first position and the second position with the first axis as the center of rotation (see, for example, JP 2011-120640 A). In this case, for example, when the first position is the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member arranged at the first position from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is restricted by opposing the driving force of the driving means against the gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is held at the first position). Energy consumption necessary for holding the moving member is large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the moving member is mechanically held at the first position by receiving the pin member in the recess formed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove. .. That is, even if the driving force of the driving unit is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, and accordingly, the energy consumption of the driving unit can be suppressed.

Further, since the pin member is received in the recessed portion provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and the moving member is mechanically held at the first position, the moving member is mechanically moved to the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. The degree of freedom in arranging the guide groove portion and the rotary member can be increased as compared with the structure in which the guide groove portion and the rotary member are held.

Note that the recess does not have to have a bottom and may penetrate. That is, it suffices to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove portions and that face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being substantially orthogonal to.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged in a direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first shaft and the pin member, Moreover, since the second member is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the second shaft and the pin member, the moving member rotates about the first shaft even when the driving force of the driving unit is released. Since the inner wall surface of the concave portion presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, depending on the pressing of the pin member accompanying the rotation of the moving member, A rotation about the second axis cannot be formed. Accordingly, the holding of the moving member at the first position can be performed more firmly. Therefore, for example, even if the moving member is shaken by the player hitting or rocking the gaming machine, the moving member can be surely held at the first position and moved downward in the gravity direction ( Can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the concave portion is formed to be curved in an arc shape around the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is arranged at the first position. Gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the concave portion is curved in an arc shape around the second axis of the rotating member in the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position. Therefore, after the moving member is arranged at the first position, the pin member can be received in the recess while suppressing the posture of the moving member from changing.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the concave portion is an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion that opposes, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A game machine D4, which is provided on the inner wall surface on the side where the game is performed.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the concave portion is an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion that faces each other, and when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (rotating direction of the rotating member), and The moving member can be held in the first position by receiving the pin member in the recess.

The gaming machine D5 according to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, characterized in that the recessed portion is provided on an inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other, and the inner wall surface on a side closer to the first axis.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recessed portion is provided on the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion facing each other and on the side closer to the first axis. The recess can be provided in the dead space between the guide groove and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by disposing the concave portion on the side of the first shaft in this manner, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member in the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position can be further shortened. With the rotation about the first axis, the inner wall surface of the recess can reduce the force pressing the pin member. This allows the moving member to be held more firmly at the first position.

A moving member that is slidably movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member; and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the gaming machine described above, a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member is provided, and the moving member includes a plurality of members inserted into the slide holes of the base member. The transmission means is arranged on the other surface side of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged, and the transmission means moves the driving force of the driving means. At least one of a plurality of projecting portions of the moving member, the first member transmitting to the member, the first member projecting to the other surface side of the base member via the slide hole of the base member. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being connected to a protrusion.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving unit is generated, the first member of the transmitting unit is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving unit, and the displacement of the first member is the protrusion of the moving member. Be transmitted to. As a result, the protrusion of the moving member is moved along the slide hole, so that the moving member is slid.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is slidably movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are moved. There is a game machine that includes a transmission unit that transmits to a member, and transmits the driving force of the drive unit to the moving member by the transmitting unit to slide the moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-229885). .. In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions to be inserted into the slide holes. On the other hand, if the number of protrusions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing slipping out of the slide hole) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing the cost while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes the first member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the first member is one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. At least one of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member that is disposed on the other surface side of the base member that is on the opposite side to and that is projected to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Since they are connected, at least one of the components for holding the protrusion can be used as the first member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of the protruding portions, enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, reduce the number of parts for holding the protruding portions, and reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the first member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the drive means to the first member, and the base member is a connection formed as an opening. A hole, the driving means and the connecting member of the transmitting means are disposed on one surface side of the base member, and the connecting member is connected to the first member through the connecting hole of the base member. A gaming machine E2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connection member that is connected to the first member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the first member, and is formed as an opening. Since the base member is provided with a connecting hole for connecting the connecting member to the first member via the connecting hole of the base member, the connecting member of the driving means and the transmitting means is arranged on the one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. can do. Thereby, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the disposition of the constituent member on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used, It is possible to reduce the size as a whole.

In the gaming machine E2, the first member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, and the gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, the connection member is arranged on one surface side of the base member, and the first member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and the connection member and the first member are connected through the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the transmission path of the driving force formed by the connecting member and the first member becomes long. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving unit is transmitted, the connection member and the first member may be deformed, and the transmission force may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the first member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the base member is utilized to improve the rigidity of the connecting member and the first member as a whole. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the first member.

Particularly, in the gaming machine E3, since the first member of the connection member and the first member is rotatably supported by the base member, this is more than the case where the connection member is rotatably supported by the base member. The distance from the shaft supporting point to the base member to the projecting portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, the stable transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member can be achieved with fewer shaft supporting points.

In the gaming machine E1, the first member is connected to at least one protrusion of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that is protruded to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. And a rack member formed as a rack on one side of which a tooth is formed along the sliding direction of the moving member, and a pinion meshed with the rack member and transmitted from the driving means. A gaming machine E4, comprising: a pinion member that transmits a driving force to the rack member.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the first member is formed as a rack and pinion (a rack member and a pinion member), and the teeth of the rack member are marked along the sliding movement direction of the moving member. Since it is provided, the driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the moving member as a driving force in the linear direction by way of the first member, and as a result, the sliding movement of the moving member can be stabilized. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine E4, the rack member is connected to at least two or more protrusions of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that are protruded to the other surface side of the base member through the slide holes of the base member. A gaming machine E5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, the rack member is one of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member that is projected to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Since it is connected to at least two or more protrusions, at least two or more components among the components for holding the protrusions can be used as the rack member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of the protruding portions, enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, reduce the number of parts for holding the protruding portions, and reduce the cost.

It should be noted that connecting two or more protrusions of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that slides to the first member in this manner causes the driving force of the drive unit to be applied to the moving member by rocking (rotating). With the first member configured to transmit, it is impossible because the movement locus of the connecting portion with the projecting portion becomes an arc shape, and by forming the first member as a rack and pinion like the gaming machine E7, This is possible for the first time (the movement path of the rack member can be set to a straight line to correspond to the sliding movement of the moving member), whereby the number of protrusions is secured and the sliding movement of the moving member is stable. It is possible to reduce the number of parts for holding the protrusion and reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member includes a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of slide movement of the moving member, and the rack member of the first member has a row of slide holes of each row. A gaming machine E6, characterized in that each is connected to at least one protrusion.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4 or E5, the base member is provided with a plurality of rows of slide holes extending along the direction of sliding movement of the moving member. With this, it is possible to guide each of the plurality of projecting portions of the moving member, and accordingly, the sliding movement of the moving member can be stably performed. In this case, since the rack member of the first member is connected to at least one protrusion in each row of the slide holes, it is possible to prevent the posture of the moving member from tilting when the moving member slides. it can. In addition, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions and enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, reduce the number of components for holding the protrusions, and reduce costs.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is vertical, and the moving member is provided along the slide hole of the base member. The game machine E7 is characterized in that is slid in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid in the vertical direction along the slide hole, the configuration in which the first member is disposed on the other surface side of the base member is effective, and the moving member can be stably slid. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is the vertical direction, the moving member is inclined forward in a direction away from the one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the first member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward tilting posture of the moving member is determined by the first member as well as the component for holding the protrusion. Can also be regulated, and as a result, the moving member can be slid in a stable state.

In the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the first member is connected to a protruding portion located at an upper side of at least the center of the moving member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E7, since the first member is connected to the protruding portion located at least above the center of the moving member, one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. The first member can effectively regulate the forward-tilting posture of the moving member with respect to the moving member that is in the forward-tilting posture toward the direction away from, and as a result, the moving member slides in a more stable state. Can be made.

A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means has a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a tooth surface meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane, and is horizontally displaced as the pinion rotates. And a link member that has one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member and is erected or tilted as the rack moves in the horizontal direction. The moving member is arranged in a raised position and the moving member is arranged in a lowered position due to the tilting of the link member. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being close to a tooth surface and a plane orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack.

According to the gaming machine F1, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is moved along with the displacement of the rack to one side in the horizontal direction. When the rack is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position, and when the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to the other side in the horizontal direction. The link member is erected with the displacement to the side, and as the link member is erected, the moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the raised position.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the moving member. There is a game machine in which the transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion in a part of the transmission path of the driving force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-065923). In this case, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (falling) due to the action of gravity. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is regulated (that is, the moving member is held in the raised position by opposing the driving force of the driving unit against the gravity (weight of the moving member)). ), the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is close to the tooth surface of the rack and the plane orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack at the rising position of the moving member, As the force component acting on the rack from the link member, it is possible to suppress the generation of the force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction. Accordingly, even if the driving force of the drive unit is released, the moving member can be held at the raised position, and as a result, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member can be suppressed.

In addition, being close to a plane (hereinafter referred to as a “reference plane”) orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack means that the reference plane and a direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member are This means that the angle is set to at least 30 degrees or less (preferably 15 degrees or less). Therefore, a mode in which the direction connecting the one end and the other end of the link member is located within the reference plane is also included in the example of the gaming machine F1.

In the gaming machine F1, a pinion and a rack of the transmission means are provided with a base member rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and a link member, respectively, and the link member is The base members are disposed to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base members are interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving member is located at the raised position, and the pair of links. A gaming machine F2, characterized in that it is provided with an interposition part that is formed so as to be capable of contacting the facing surfaces of the members.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is arranged at the raised position, the gaming machine F2 is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and also the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member includes the interposition portion that is formed so as to be able to contact, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the raised position. That is, at the raised position, since the pair of link members are erected, it is difficult to maintain the posture thereof, and the posture of the moving member tends to be unstable, and the interposition portion is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the facing direction (that is, the moving direction of the rack) by the interposition portion. Accordingly, the pair of link members can be maintained in the upright state, and the posture of the moving member can be stabilized at the raised position.

The gaming machine F1 or F2 includes a base member on which a pinion and a rack of the transmission means are rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member. Are disposed so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member has a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that one end sides of the pair of link members are respectively provided between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, a moving member is connected to the other end of the link member, and the position of the center of gravity is likely to change due to the input of a disturbance, and it is difficult to maintain its posture (stable movement). Since the racks are arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, the pair of link members arranged to face each other in the moving direction of the rack can cancel each other's displacements. It can be maintained. On the other hand, since the pair of link members have their one ends interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions, respectively, the pair of facing wall portions causes a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members. Can be regulated. Accordingly, the postures of the pair of link members can be maintained and the moving member can be moved in a stable posture.

In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member has a standing height that is increased as the moving member approaches the raised position.

According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the rising position (that is, as the link member is erected), the standing height of the facing wall portion is increased (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the facing wall portion). Since the area facing the side becomes large), the movement of the moving member can be stabilized while improving the appearance. That is, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the opposing wall portion from being impaired by raising the standing height of the facing wall portion partially rather than raising the height, and the link member is erected (that is, The more difficult it becomes to move the moving member in a stable posture), the more the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member by the facing wall portion can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to move the moving member in a stable posture while suppressing deterioration of the appearance.

In this case, in at least one of the pair of opposing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is increased is in a state where the moving member is arranged in the lowered position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable that the height is set so that the other end of the link member (the side connected to the moving member) can face the link member. According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged in the lowered position can be obtained at the same time by utilizing the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. You can

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extension member that extends in a direction orthogonal to a tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extension member and the extension member is provided. A guide portion that is guided along the extending direction of the member, wherein the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack; The gaming machine F5, wherein the moving member is arranged between the link member and the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

According to the gaming machine F5, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extending member that extends in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guides the guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction is provided. Since the extending member is disposed between the link member and the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (that is, necessary for holding the moving member) is provided. It is possible to secure smooth movement of the moving member while exhibiting various energy consumption suppressions).

When a pair of link members is provided and an interposition portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extension member inside the interposition portion. An extension member is arranged in the central portion where a pair of link members face each other, and while enhancing the guide effect of the movement of the moving member, the inside of the interposing portion that becomes a dead space is effectively used, and the overall size is reduced. Because you can

The gaming machine F6 according to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, wherein the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to a tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to a moving direction of the rack.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack. When the moving member is arranged in the raised position, the weight of the moving member acts on the rack via the link member even in the offset direction of the moving member. That is, a force component in the offset direction of the moving member can be generated as a force component applied to the rack from the link member. Therefore, since the weight of the moving member can reduce the force component in the direction in which the rack is moved in the horizontal direction, the energy consumption of the drive unit required to hold the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed. ..

If the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth flanks of the rack and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity is likely to change due to the input of disturbance due to the offset. The configuration of the gaming machine F3 becomes particularly effective.

In the gaming machine F6, the moving member is capable of changing the amount of the offset as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and the amount of the offset of the moving member at the raised position is at least the moved at the lowered position. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being made larger than the amount of offset of the members.

Here, when the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth flanks of the rack and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the force component in the offset direction is generated when the moving member is in the raised position. It is possible to prevent the rack from being moved in the horizontal direction due to the weight of the moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive unit necessary for holding the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed accordingly. On the other hand, when the moving member is moved between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction becomes a resistance, and the energy consumption of the driving means necessary to move the moving member increases by that amount. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F6, the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed as the rack moves in the horizontal direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member in the raised position can be changed. Since it is made larger than the offset amount of the moving member at least in the lowered position, the force component in the offset direction is secured in the raised position, and the rack is prevented from moving horizontally due to the weight of the moving member. it can. On the other hand, when the moving member is moved between the lowered position and the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be reduced to reduce the resistance. From the above, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member in the raised position and the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position. It is possible to achieve both.

The gaming machine F7 includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and one end of the link member has the offset direction with respect to the rack. Is connected to the rack in a state of being displaceable along and is interposed between the pair of facing wall portions facing each other, and the moving member is arranged at a raised position between the pair of facing wall portions facing each other. In the offset direction from the rack, a portion of the link member where one end of the link member is interposed is located at least at a position where the one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is arranged in the lowered position. The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the amount of separation is increased.

According to the gaming machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack so as to be displaceable in the offset direction with respect to the rack, and is also provided between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions. When being moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the facing portion of the pair of facing wall portions, so that the link member is erected or tilted while being moved in the offset direction. Can be made. As a result, when the link member stands or tilts, the moving member can also be moved along the offset direction, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

In this case, between the pair of facing walls, at least the moving member is lowered at a portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is arranged in the raised position (when the link member is erected). When it is placed in the position (when the link member is tilted), the amount of separation in the offset direction from the rack is larger than the portion where one end of the link member is interposed, so the offset of the moving member in the raised position Can be greater than at least the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. As a result, at the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be secured, the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member at the raised position can be suppressed, and the moving member can move between the lowered position and the raised position. When the member is moved, the force component in the offset direction (that is, the resistance) can be reduced, and the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position can be suppressed.

Particularly, in the gaming machine F8, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state where it can be displaced in the offset direction with respect to the rack, so that the one end of the link member is guided along the facing of the pair of facing wall portions. When moving, the link member itself can be moved along the offset direction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of resistance when the link member moves along the facing between the pair of facing wall portions, and as a result, the driving means necessary for moving the link member between the ascending position and the descending position. Energy consumption can be suppressed.

The gaming machine F7 includes a pair of opposing wall portions that extend along the moving direction of the rack and that are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval, and one end of the link member has the offset direction with respect to the rack. Is connected to the rack in a state in which it cannot be displaced along, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is provided between the facing portions of the pair of facing wall portions, Between the facing portions, a portion where one end of the link member is provided when the moving member is arranged at the rising position, and at least one end of the link member is provided when the moving member is arranged at the descending position. A gaming machine F9, characterized in that the amount of separation from the rack in the offset direction is made larger than that of the portion.

According to the gaming machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which it cannot be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end side is a pair of opposing wall parts with respect to the part connected to the rack. When the rack is moved in the horizontal direction, one end of the link member is guided along the facing of the pair of facing wall portions, so that the link member is It is possible to stand or tilt while elastically deforming along the offset direction. As a result, the moving member can be moved along the offset direction in accordance with the rising or tilting of the link member, and the amount of offset of the moving member can be changed.

In this case, between the pair of facing walls, at least the moving member is lowered at a portion where one end of the link member is interposed when the moving member is arranged in the raised position (when the link member is erected). When it is placed in the position (when the link member is tilted), the amount of separation in the offset direction from the rack is larger than the portion where one end of the link member is interposed, so the offset of the moving member in the raised position Can be greater than at least the amount of offset of the moving member in the lowered position. As a result, at the raised position, the force component in the offset direction can be secured, the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for holding the moving member at the raised position can be suppressed, and the moving member can move between the lowered position and the raised position. When the member is moved, the force component in the offset direction (that is, the resistance) can be reduced, and the energy consumption of the drive means necessary for moving the moving member between the raised position and the lowered position can be suppressed.

Particularly, in the gaming machine F9, one end of the link member is connected to the rack in a state in which the link member cannot be displaced along the offset direction with respect to the rack, and the other end side of the portion connected to the rack is a pair of opposing wall portions. Since the link member is interposed between the facing members, when the link member is erected (when the link member is placed in the raised position), the elastically deformed link member is pressed against one of the pair of facing wall portions. be able to. As a result, in the state where the moving member is arranged in the raised position, in addition to the force component in the offset direction due to the offset of the moving member, the resistance increases due to the pressing of the link member against the opposing wall portion, which causes the rack to move. It is possible to suppress horizontal movement due to the weight of the moving member. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive unit necessary for holding the moving member in the raised position can be suppressed accordingly.

A game provided with a movable member that is movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has teeth in at least a portion thereof, and a first transmission member to which the moving member is coupled, and a second transmission member having teeth capable of meshing with the teeth of the first transmission member in at least a portion thereof. A transmission member; and a connection member that is connected to the second transmission member and transmits the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member. The connection member is continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member is meshed with each other. Is transmitted to the first transmission member via the, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved along with the rotation of the first transmission member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member that is movably formed, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. A first transmission member having a moving member connected thereto, and a second transmission member that meshes with the first transmission member and transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the first transmission member through the meshing. There is a game machine in which a part of the driving means is formed by the transmission member (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-110376). In this case, the second transmitting member is rotated by the driving force of the driving unit, and the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member is rotated, so that the moving member connected to the first transmitting member is moved. The first transmission member is moved along with the rotation. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member, the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move the moving member. When the moving member shakes while moving, the first transmitting member may be displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, and the meshing with the second transmitting member may be lost. Even if it is possible to avoid the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, the meshing area with the teeth of the second transmission member is increased by the amount of displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member. There is a risk that the surface pressure is reduced and the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface, which causes uneven wear of the teeth and lowers the durability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, since the teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member are formed in the connecting member, even when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disengagement of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from each other. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the meshing area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connection member can be secured, so that the deviation of each tooth It is possible to suppress wear and improve durability.

The teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient if they are formed in a part of the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

In the gaming machine G1, the connection member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmission member along the axial direction of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion in which the teeth are formed, and the tooth formation thereof. And a body portion connected to a standing tip of the portion, the tooth forming portion has a surface opposite to a side on which the teeth are formed curved in an arc shape with the axis of the second transmission member as a center. A gaming machine G2, which is formed as a concave curved surface.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmitting member along the axial direction of the second transmitting member, Since the surface of the transmission member on the side opposite to the side where the continuous teeth are formed is formed as a concave curved surface that is curved in an arc shape with the axis of the second transmission member as the center, Even when connecting to the axial end surface of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member mounted on the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be increased by that much. The diameter can be reduced. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from a resin material, the tooth forming portion is formed by forming the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as a concave curved surface as described above. It is possible to make the wall thickness uniform and improve the moldability thereof.

In the gaming machine G2, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member, the teeth are formed over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion, the gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over the range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion. It is possible to sufficiently secure the area to be covered and more reliably prevent the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the thickness of the tooth forming portion is reduced as a whole. It is possible to improve the formability by making the temperature uniform.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a second moving member in which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged and is formed so as to be movable, and a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction. A member, the transmission means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member is A gaming machine G4, wherein one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the second transmission member.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the gaming machine G4 includes a second moving member on which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged, and the second moving member is a guide member. Is guided in a linear direction by the transmission means, the transmission means comprises a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the drive means, and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with the rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member is attached to the rack. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the connecting member is displaced by operating the rack and pinion by the driving force of the driving means, and the second member is moved according to the displacement of the connecting member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed simultaneously. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be combined into one member (coupling member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine G4, the rack has a tooth surface that is meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member horizontally moves the rack. Is guided in the vertical direction by the guide member in accordance with the displacement in the direction, and the connecting member is configured such that when the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are the first transmission members. A gaming machine G5, which is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member.

According to the gaming machine G5, the rack has a tooth surface which is meshed with the pinion arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction with the rotation of the pinion, and the second moving member moves in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the guide member is guided in the vertical direction along with the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to one side in the horizontal direction. The connecting member is tilted in accordance with the displacement of the rack, and the second moving member is moved downward (downward) toward the lower position as the connecting member is tilted, while the rack is displaced horizontally to the other side by the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is erected with the displacement of the rack to the other side in the horizontal direction, and as the connecting member is erected, the second moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the raised position.

In this case, when the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, it is difficult to maintain the posture of the connecting member because the connecting member is erected, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. As a result, the posture of the moving member arranged on the second moving member becomes more unstable. Therefore, the swing of the second moving member makes the swing of the moving member more noticeable, and the displacement of the first transmitting member accompanying the swing of the moving member becomes large. That is, in the state where the second moving member is arranged at the raised position, the meshing between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member is likely to be disengaged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, the connecting member causes the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion to perform the first transmission when the second moving member is arranged in the raised position. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member due to the swing of the moving member becomes large, and in the state where the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is most likely to be dislocated. The teeth formed in the tooth forming portion can be effectively utilized. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively prevent the meshing of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means includes the rack, a connecting member whose one end is connected to the rack, a second transmitting member whose other end is connected to the rack, and teeth of the second transmitting member. A pair of first transmission members that are combined with each other and a moving member that is connected to the first transmission member are provided in a pair, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member of one set are the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state where they are meshed with the member and the second transmission member. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even if only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are meshed with each other, the synchronization accuracy of the moving member can be improved. Therefore, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are By engaging with each other, it is possible to increase the number of meshing points (meshing area) and to disperse the surface pressure of the tooth surface by that amount, so that the durability can be improved.

A plurality of movable members formed so as to be movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to each of the plurality of moving members. A gaming machine in which the plurality of moving members are retreated to different retreat positions, and the plurality of moving members are coupled to each other by being moved from different retreat positions and arranged at a reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member that are moved adjacent to each other at the reference position and the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that is in contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction substantially orthogonal to each other, and the third moving member moves the first moving member and the second moving member at the reference position. By abutting on each of the members, a force in a direction to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are combined. A gaming machine H1 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from different retracted positions to be arranged at the reference position.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members that are movably formed, a drive unit that generates a drive force for moving each of the plurality of movable members, and a drive force of the drive unit. A plurality of moving members that are respectively moved to different reference positions and are moved to different reference positions. There is a game machine to which are combined (for example, see JP 2012-115300 A). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not properly joined at the reference position, the effect produced by joining the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, as in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is relatively easy to connect a pair of symmetrical moving members face to face, but it is difficult to connect three or more moving members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged adjacent to each other at the reference position, and are substantially orthogonal to the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member contacts the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since a force is generated in the direction to bring them close to each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to ensure the effect produced by combining a plurality of moving members.

In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are respectively provided with a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion, and abutted on the first abutting portion and the second abutting portion, respectively. The third moving member is provided with a third abutting portion, and the third abutting portion of the third moving member is a first abutting portion and a second abutting portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. By being brought into contact with each other, a force in a direction of bringing the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, and the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member are the same as the first contact member. The concave shape is formed by the contact portion and the second contact portion and is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member, while the front view shape of the third moving member is: A gaming machine H2, which is formed by the third contact portion and has a protruding shape in which the center protrudes corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member.

According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged next to each other at the reference position, with respect to the first contact portion and the second contact portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third contact portion of the third moving member is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member, a force in a direction of bringing the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other is formed, whereby the first moving member and the second moving member. And the third moving member is coupled.

In this case, the front view shape (combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape in which the center is recessed, while the front view of the third moving member. Since the shape (third abutting portion) is a protruding shape in which the center is projected corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, these first moving member, second moving member, and It is possible to improve the effect of production by moving the three moving members from the retracted position to the reference position and coupling them at the reference position.

That is, the front view shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are, as described above, the first moving member and the second moving member arranged adjacent to each other, and the concave shape is formed. In the form in which the third moving member that moves toward the shape has the protruding shape, when the third moving member is moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the third moving member moves between the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. When the player recalls a mode in which the three moving members enter and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in the direction in which they are separated from each other, according to the gaming machine H2, the third moving member (third hitting member) is set at the reference position. The contact portion) is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (the first contact portion and the second contact portion), so that the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other. A force can be created to couple the first moving member, the second moving member and the third moving member. As a result, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the game machine H1 can be operated in a mode different from that expected by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported by the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are at the reference position. In a state where they are arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member is narrower than the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because it is possible to form a force in a direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

In the gaming machine H1, the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape that is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member, while the third moving member is formed. A game machine H3, wherein a front view shape of the moving member is a protruding shape having a center protruding corresponding to the concave shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the front view shape of the first moving member and the second moving member is a concave shape in which the center is depressed, while the front view shape of the third moving member is Since the first moving member and the second moving member have a protruding shape in which the center is protruded corresponding to the concave shape, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are referred to from the retracted position. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect by moving to the position and coupling at the reference position.

That is, the front view shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are, as described above, the first moving member and the second moving member arranged adjacent to each other, and the concave shape is formed. In the form in which the third moving member that moves toward the shape has the protruding shape, when the third moving member is moved from the retracted position to the reference position, the third moving member moves between the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other. When the player recalls a mode in which the three moving members enter and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in the direction away from each other, according to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member is contacted at the reference position. Thus, a force in a direction of bringing the first moving member and the second moving member close to each other can be formed, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be coupled. As a result, the operation can be performed in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the operation can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member include a first restricting portion and a second restricting portion, and a third restricting portion that is in contact with each of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. The third moving member is provided, and at least one of the third restricting portion and the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion is used when the third moving member is moved toward the reference position. The first moving member and the second moving member are formed so as to be formed so as to incline in such a shape that they become wider toward the advancing direction side, and the third restricting portion abuts from both sides of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. A gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that the gaming machines H4 are displaced in a direction in which they approach each other.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third restricting portion, the first restricting portion, and the second restricting portion has the third moving member moved toward the reference position. It is formed so as to incline in such a shape that it becomes wider toward the advancing direction side when moving, and the third restricting portion abuts from both sides of the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion, so that the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since the members are displaced in the directions in which they are close to each other, the displacement of the first moving member and the second moving member in the directions in which they are close to each other can be reliably performed. Therefore, the structure that allows the first moving member and the second moving member to move can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

In the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively disposed on the back sides of the portions forming the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the third restricting portion. Is provided on the back side of a portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are provided on the back side of the portions forming the front view shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively. At the same time, since the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the portion forming the front view shape of the third moving member, these first restricting portion, second restricting portion and third restricting portion are provided to the player. It is possible to suppress visual recognition. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the external shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation.

In the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member are inclined downward or upward toward the front side of the first moving member and the second moving member, and the first moving member and the second moving member are inclined. Each of the third moving member includes a first inclined surface and a second inclined surface that are continuous with the front surface of the second moving member, and the third moving member is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface. A gaming machine H6, which is provided with a third inclined surface that is continuous with the front surface of the first inclined surface and is in contact with each of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface at the reference position.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4 or H5, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first inclined surface and a second inclined surface which are continuous with the front surfaces of the first moving member and the second moving member. The third moving member includes a third inclined surface that is inclined in the same direction as the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface and that is continuous with the front surface of the third movable member, and includes the inclined surfaces. Since the surface, the second inclined surface, and the third inclined surface are in contact with each other, the contact between the inclined surfaces causes the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member to move in the front-back direction (front and rear surfaces). Can be positioned in the direction of connecting the two). Furthermore, when the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are coupled at the reference position by the contact between the inclined surfaces, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member. It is possible to let the player recognize the front view shape so that there is no gap between the and, and as a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by combining at the reference position.

In the gaming machine H6, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are arranged on the back sides of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, respectively, and the third restricting portion is disposed on the third inclined surface. A gaming machine H7, which is arranged on the back side.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are respectively provided on the back sides of the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third inclined surface. Since the third restricting portion is disposed on the back side of the, the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion, and the third restricting portion can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the front view shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from the player's expectation. ..

Here, the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion are formed in an inclined shape that is invisible in a front view, and the first and second inclined surfaces are formed, and the third restricting portion is invisible in a front view. The third inclined surface may be formed in an inclined shape. In addition, in this way, making each regulation part invisible by a front view due to each inclined surface means that in the structure in which the front of each regulation part (the front side of each moving member) is formed as a horizontal plane, the first regulation part is formed. And even if one of the second restricting portion and the third restricting portion is arranged invisible on the back side of the horizontal plane, the other is exposed, so it is impossible, and like the gaming machine H7, each restricting portion. Is possible only by forming an inclined surface in front of (the front side of each moving member) (without exposing both the first restricting part, the second restricting part, and the third restricting part, It can be made invisible on the back side of each inclined surface when viewed from the front), so that the player can visually recognize the first restricting portion, the second restricting portion, and the third restricting portion with reference to the retracted position. Even during movement to and from the position, it can be surely suppressed. As a result, by combining the concave shape and the protruding shape, it is possible to further enhance the effect of operating in a manner different from that expected by the player.

In the gaming machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member have a first positioning surface and a second positioning surface which are tilted upward or downward in a direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, respectively. In addition, the third moving member is inclined upward or downward in the same direction as the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface and abutted on the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface at the reference position, respectively. A gaming machine H8 having three positioning surfaces.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H7, the first moving member and the second moving member have the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface, respectively, and the third moving member has the third positioning surface. Since the first positioning surface, the second positioning surface, and the third positioning surface are in contact with each other at the reference position, the contact between the inclined surfaces causes the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving surface. Positioning with a member can be performed. In particular, the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface are inclined upward or downward in the direction opposite to the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface, and the third positioning surface is the first positioning surface and the second positioning surface. Since it is inclined in the same direction as the positioning surface, the direction of positioning by contact between these positioning surfaces is opposite to the direction of positioning by contact between the first inclined surface and the second inclined surface and the third inclined surface. Can be direction. As a result, not only can the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member be positioned in the front-rear direction (direction connecting the front surface and the back surface), but also be held at the positioning position in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress relative displacement of the third moving member with respect to the first moving member and the second moving member after the joining at the reference position and rattling.

A movable member formed so as to be movable; a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member, In a gaming machine in which the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member is provided. A game machine I1 comprising a positioning means for positioning the meshing position at the predetermined phase.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable member that is movably formed, a driving unit that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit to the moving member. There is a game machine that includes a transmission unit that transmits, and the transmission unit includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (for example, a special feature). (See Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-125092). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the other of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is rotated by the rotation of one of the first transmission member and the second transmission member, The moving member is moved by the other rotation. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the moving range of the moving member is deviated. Therefore, when assembling (engaging) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the engagement position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, and then to assemble. The positioning work was complicated.

On the other hand, the gaming machine I1 includes the positioning means for positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, so that the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (tooth). In this case, the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by utilizing such positioning means. That is, when positioning the meshing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, but may be formed in a part of the circumferential direction.

In the gaming machine I1, a first transmission member and a second transmission member include a base member rotatably supported, and the positioning means includes a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And a first transmission member positioning portion and a second transmission member positioning portion formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. A gaming machine I2 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed on the base member, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are supported. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at the position to be aligned, the first transmission member positioning portion is made to coincide with the first base positioning portion, and By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while aligning the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion and the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed as a through hole, such one penetration The positioning work for positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member is further simplified by inserting the jig into the hole and bringing the tip of the inserted jig into contact with (or through) the other end. It can be done accurately and accurately.

In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first shaft and a second shaft that are provided so as to project toward the front surface of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning is performed. And the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, a gaming machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2, in the case where the base member includes the first shaft and the second shaft which are projected from the front surface of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are positioned while the second transmission member is positioned in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When assembling the member to the base member, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted from the back surface of the base member into the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. With this, the jig can be projected from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. Thereby, at the same time as the work of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member from the front surface of the base member to the first shaft and the second shaft, respectively, at the same time, the tip of the jig is attached to the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to perform a positioning operation of contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped with each other in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portions are formed as through holes at positions corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A gaming machine I4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is made up of a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is provided at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are respectively formed as the through holes, the positioning work of the pair of gears can be performed at the same time, and the workability of the positioning work can be improved accordingly. Further, since the positioning work of the pair of gears can be performed using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to connect the pair of gears to each other, the pair of gears can be rotatably supported by a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may have the same structure.

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that are coaxially overlapped with each other in the axial direction, and the pair of members includes a protruding portion protruding from one member and the protruding portion. The second transmission member positioning portion is formed in a member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members, the recess being provided in the other member for receiving. Gaming machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member includes a pair of members that coaxially overlap each other in the axial direction, and a member that is arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the second transmission member positioning portion, the member disposed on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. .. In this case, the pair of members can position the pair of members in a predetermined phase by receiving the protrusion of one member in the recess of the other member, and cannot relatively rotate (that is, in synchronization with each other). (Rotatable) can be pivotally supported on a common shaft. In particular, since the protrusion of the pair of members is received and fitted in the recess, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

The concave portion does not need to have a bottom, and may be formed as a through hole. That is, it is sufficient for the recess to be formed so as to be able to receive the connecting projection and perform positioning in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) when the pair of members are coaxially stacked.

A game having a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out opening for discharging a game ball that has not flown into the plurality of winning openings and has flowed out of the game area. In the machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the game area or to the position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area. The first outlet is provided in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the first outlet is provided on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, and the first outlet. A gaming machine J1 comprising: a second outlet that is arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to a winning opening.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and a game area in which a gaming ball that has not flown into the plurality of winning openings and flows down There is a gaming machine provided with an out port for discharging from (for example, see JP2012-143268A). In recent years, a liquid crystal display device is required to be large in size in order to enhance the effect of presentation. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, the position of the winning opening also needs to be lowered accordingly. However, if the position of the winning opening falls too downward, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the gaming ball to flow down below the winning opening (a lower edge of the game area, for example, an inner rail). That is, the game ball that has not flown into the winning port and flows down cannot be discharged from the out port. Therefore, there is a limit in lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be made sufficiently large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out-out openings are the first out-out opening and the first out-out opening, which are arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first win-winning opening of the plurality of win-winning openings. Since the second outlet is provided on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the prize opening of the first prize opening, the first prize opening is not won, and the second outlet is located on the width direction one side of the first prize opening. The game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area by the first outlet, while the game ball that has flowed to the other side in the width direction than the first winning port without being awarded to the first winning port is the second. It can be discharged from the game area by the outlet. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (lower edge of the game area, for example, between the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass through between the lower edge of the game area), and accordingly, the liquid crystal display device. Can be upsized.

In the gaming machine J1, a game board having a game area in which a game area is formed on the front side is light-transmissive, which is provided with an effect member for effecting winning of a game ball into a second prize hole of the plurality of prize holes. Made of an elastic material, the effect member is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board, and the second winning opening and the effect member are provided in the first winning opening. On the other hand, a gaming machine J2 which is arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, an effect member is provided which performs an effect associated with winning the game ball into the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Since the game board made of a light-transmissive material is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side, the scene is presented to the player who visually recognizes the game ball being won in the second winning opening. The effect by the effect member can be visually recognized at the same time behind, and the effect associated with the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

In this case, since the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on one side in the width direction or on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, the positions of the second winning opening and the effect member. Can be lowered, and the position of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the liquid crystal display device can be upsized even when the effect member is provided.

That is, arranging the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening prevents the effect member from interfering with the liquid crystal display device, which hinders the size increase of the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, by arranging the first out port and the second out port on one side in the width direction and on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning port, Not only can the position of the first winning opening be lowered, but the degree of freedom of the arrangement position of the first winning opening on one side or the other side in the width direction of the game area can be secured. It is possible to secure a space for disposing the second winning opening and the effect members, and as a result, according to the gaming machine J2, a layout in which the effect members are disposed on the back side of the game board at a position corresponding to the second winning opening. Became possible.

In the gaming machine J2, the gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning port is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the second winning port is disposed substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device is increased and the gaming area is limited. By effectively utilizing the space provided, it is possible to secure a wider space for disposing the effect member. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. In addition, by arranging the second winning port in the approximate center of the game area in the width direction, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning port. As a result, it is possible to enhance the playability for winning the game ball in the second winning opening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the effect by the effect member that accompanies the winning in the second winning opening.

In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is arranged at a position where at least a part of the second effect member overlaps the effect member. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being installed.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second effect member disposed on the back side of the game board is provided, and the second effect member is at least one in front view. Since the part is arranged at a position overlapping the effect member, when the game board is made of a light-transmissive material, the player can visually recognize only the necessary part of the second effect member and effect the other part. It is possible to shield the player from the member. Thereby, the second effect member does not need to be designed on the assumption that the whole is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom of design can be improved.

The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, wherein the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable about the second winning opening.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape rotatable around the second winning opening, and thus surrounds the second winning opening. The effect can be performed in the entire area, and the effect of the effect associated with the winning of the second winning opening can be enhanced.

In this case, the second winning port needs to be arranged at a position where a space for letting the game ball flow down can be secured both above and below the second winning port, and in the game area with respect to the second winning port. Since the first winning port is arranged at one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning port. Thus, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be utilized most effectively, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E7, F1 to F9, G1 to G5, H1 to H8, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K3, which is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that is slidably movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving unit are transmitted to the moving member. There is a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member by the transmitting means, and sliding the moving member (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-229885).
In this case, in order to stably perform the sliding movement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protrusions to be inserted into the slide holes.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, if the number of protrusions is increased in order to perform stable slide movement, the number of parts for holding the protrusions (preventing slipping out of the slide hole) However, there is a problem that the cost also increases.
The present technical idea is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and to provide a gaming machine in which the number of parts for holding the protrusion is reduced and the cost can be suppressed. With the goal.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1 has a moving member that is slidably movable, a driving unit that generates a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving unit thereof. Transmission means for transmitting the generated driving force to the moving member, and a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along a direction of sliding movement of the moving member, The moving member includes a plurality of protrusions that are inserted into the slide holes of the base member, and the transmitting means is provided on the opposite side of the base member on which the moving member is disposed. A link member is provided on the other surface side for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the moving member, and the link member is projected to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. The movable member is connected to at least one protrusion of the plurality of protrusions.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the transmission means is a connecting member that is connected to the link member and that transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member. The base member includes a connection hole formed as an opening, the drive means and the connection member of the transmission means are disposed on one surface side of the base member, and through the connection hole of the base member. The connecting member is connected to the link member.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the link member of the transmission means is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the link member of the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the link member is the moving member. Is transmitted to the protruding part of the. As a result, the protrusion of the moving member is moved along the slide hole, so that the moving member is slid. In this case, the transmission means includes a link member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the link member is the other surface of the base member opposite to the one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. And is connected to at least one protrusion of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that is disposed on the side and is protruded to the other surface side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member, and thus retains the protrusion. At least one of these parts can be used also as the link member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of the protruding portions, enable stable sliding movement of the moving member, reduce the number of parts for holding the protruding portions, and reduce the cost.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect obtained by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the connecting member that is connected to the link member and that transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member is transmitted to the transmission means. And the base member is provided with a connection hole formed as an opening, and the connection member is connected to the link member through the connection hole of the base member. It can be arranged on one side of the member. Thereby, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the disposition of the constituent member on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used, It is possible to reduce the size as a whole.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, the connection member is arranged on one surface side of the base member, and the link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and these connection member and the link member are connected through the connection hole of the base member. Therefore, the drive force transmission path formed by the connecting member and the link member becomes long. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, the connection member and the link member may be deformed, and the transmission force may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the link member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the connecting member and the link member as a whole is increased by utilizing the rigidity of the base member. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the link member.
Particularly, in the technical idea 3, since the link member among the connecting member and the link member is rotatably supported by the base member, the base member is rotatably supported by the base member as compared with the case where the connecting member is rotatably supported by the base member. The distance from the shaft supporting point to the member to the protruding portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member can be stabilized at a smaller number of shaft supporting points.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
100 to 104 substrate box 740 drive motor (drive means)
761 pinion gear (part of transmission means)
762 rack (part of transmission means)
770 Link member (part of transmission means, connection means )
7 73 projecting wall portion (part of the connecting means)
774 Gear part (second transmission means)
774b teeth
7 90 Ring forming member (moving means)
792 Gear part (first transmission means)
792b teeth

Claims (3)

Game provided with moving means formed so as to be movable, driving means for generating driving force for moving the moving means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving means In the machine,
The transmission means includes first transmission means having teeth on at least a part thereof and to which the moving means is connected, and second transmission means having teeth capable of engaging with the teeth of the first transmission means on at least a part thereof. Connecting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmitting means, the connecting means being connected to the second transmitting means.
Teeth connected to the teeth of the second transmission means are formed in the connection means ,
The successive teeth, the gaming machine characterized by Rukoto formed in greater tooth width than the tooth width of the teeth of the second transmission means. In a gaming machine provided with a moving means that is movably formed and a transmitting means that transmits a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means,
The transmission means includes first transmission means having teeth on at least a part thereof and to which the moving means is connected, and second transmission means having teeth capable of engaging with the teeth of the first transmission means on at least a part thereof. And connecting means connected to the second transmitting means,
Teeth connecting to the teeth of the second transmitting means or the first transmitting means are formed in the connecting means or the moving means,
A game machine characterized in that the continuous teeth are formed with a tooth width larger than a tooth width of a tooth of the second transmission means or the first transmission means. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a substrate box.

Images